WO2020199609A1 - 一种通信方法及设备 - Google Patents

一种通信方法及设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020199609A1
WO2020199609A1 PCT/CN2019/120061 CN2019120061W WO2020199609A1 WO 2020199609 A1 WO2020199609 A1 WO 2020199609A1 CN 2019120061 W CN2019120061 W CN 2019120061W WO 2020199609 A1 WO2020199609 A1 WO 2020199609A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
control information
information
harq process
bit
format
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/120061
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
毕文平
余政
杨育波
程型清
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to JP2021557698A priority Critical patent/JP2022528384A/ja
Priority to EP19922626.7A priority patent/EP3941124A4/en
Priority to CN201980094855.6A priority patent/CN113647163B/zh
Priority to BR112021019510A priority patent/BR112021019510A2/pt
Publication of WO2020199609A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020199609A1/zh
Priority to US17/487,965 priority patent/US20220022021A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/50—Connection management for emergency connections
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
    • H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
    • H04L1/0061—Error detection codes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/70—Services for machine-to-machine communication [M2M] or machine type communication [MTC]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/90—Services for handling of emergency or hazardous situations, e.g. earthquake and tsunami warning systems [ETWS]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04—TPC
    • H04W52/54—Signalisation aspects of the TPC commands, e.g. frame structure
    • H04W52/58—Format of the TPC bits
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/005—Transmission of information for alerting of incoming communication
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/14—Direct-mode setup
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00—Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/18—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between terminal devices

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • the fourth-generation communication system long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A) will continue to provide wireless communication services for its user equipment (UE) in the short term (or even long term).
  • enhanced machine type communication (eMTC) systems and other evolutionary systems for example, Further eMTC (FeMTC), Even Further eMTC (eFeMTC), additional MTC (AMTC)
  • eMTC enhanced machine type communication
  • FeMTC Further eMTC
  • eFeMTC Even Further eMTC
  • ATC additional MTC
  • the system, eMTC system and other evolved systems work in the LTE system and in the LTE frequency band.
  • the working bandwidth of eMTC terminals may usually be small and smaller than the working bandwidth of the LTE system.
  • the working bandwidth of eMTC terminals may be a narrowband NB, and an NB includes 6 consecutive physical resource blocks (physical resource blocks). , PRB), a PRB includes 12 subcarriers (subcarrier, SC). Due to its low power consumption, long sleep and other characteristics, the battery life of eMTC UE is long, which is expected to reach about 10 years.
  • emergency information such as earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) information, commercial mobile alert service (CMAS) information, used to indicate system information modification
  • EWS earthquake and tsunami warning system
  • CMAS commercial mobile alert service
  • the eMTC terminal device does not update the system message very frequently. Therefore, when an emergency message is encountered, the base station informs the terminal device through a paging message or direct instruction information.
  • the paging message or direct indication information is carried in the type2 public search space, and the eMTC terminal does not monitor the search space in the connected state, so the connected eMTC terminal cannot receive emergency message notifications.
  • One possible solution is to allow eMTC terminal devices in the connected state to monitor both the type2 search space and the user-specific search space at the same time, that is, to allow the eMTC terminal devices to receive paging messages or direct indication information in the connected state.
  • the paging message and the user-specific search space may be located on different narrowbands, the eMTC terminal device needs to monitor two narrowbands at the same time, which seriously increases user complexity and user power consumption.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to solve the problem of high complexity and high power consumption when receiving an emergency message notification in a connected eMTC terminal device in the prior art.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including: a first device determines first control information, where the first control information carries first information, and the first information is used to indicate emergency information;
  • the first control information is format 3 control information; or, the first control information is format 3A control information; or, the first control information is format 6-0A control information; or, the first control information
  • the information is control information in format 6-0B; or, the first control information is control information in format 6-1A; or, the first control information is control information in format 6-1B.
  • the first device sends the first control information to the second device. And, the first device sends the emergency information to the second device.
  • the first device may instruct the second device to receive emergency information through control information of format 3, format 3A, format 6-0A, format 6-0B, format 6-1A, or format 6-1B.
  • the control information in the format of format 3 and format 3A is group control information, which is carried in the type 0 public search space, and the control information in the format of format 6-0A, format 6-0B, format 6-1A, and format 6-1B is
  • the user-specific message is carried in the user-specific search space, so the second device does not need to monitor the type2 search space for receiving emergency information, so that the user complexity is not increased, and the user power consumption is reduced.
  • control information in these formats used in the embodiments of the present application does not require additional bits to indicate emergency information, so it can be avoided Increasing the control information overhead can avoid reducing spectrum efficiency and increasing user power consumption.
  • control information in format 3 and format 3A is group control information, that is, the first device, such as a network device, can use one control information to send instruction information to multiple second devices, such as terminal devices, thereby avoiding This causes a waste of resources of the first device and saves power consumption of the first device.
  • the first control information is downlink control information.
  • the first control information may be format 3 or format 3A control information
  • the TPC command number may also be called TPC command, and each TPC command contains 2 bits.
  • the first information is indicated by the TPC command of the format 3 control information or the format 3A control information, so that the first control information can indicate the first information without adding additional bits to Indicate emergency information, so it can avoid increasing the control information overhead, thereby avoiding the reduction of spectrum efficiency and the increase of user power consumption
  • the control information in format 3 and format 3A is group control information, that is, the first device.
  • a network device can send instruction information to multiple second devices, such as terminal devices, through one control information, thereby avoiding waste of resources of the first device and saving power consumption of the first device.
  • control information of format 3 and format 3A is carried in the type 0 common search space, so the second device does not need to monitor the type 2 search space for receiving emergency information, which can reduce user complexity and reduce user power consumption. And the changes to the existing agreement are minor.
  • the K TPC commands may not be allocated to any second device to transmit transmission power control information, but are used to indicate the first information.
  • the first control information may also include M TPC commands (or TPC command numbers), and the M TPC commands are used to indicate H transmission power control commands of the second device ,
  • M and H are integers greater than or equal to 0.
  • the K TPC commands are predefined, or the K TPC commands are determined by the first device and configured to the second device through higher layer signaling.
  • the first control information is format 3 or format 3A control information, and Q bits other than the TPC command in the first control information are used to indicate the first information, where Q Is an integer greater than or equal to 1. That is, the first control information includes Q bits and N TPC commands, where Q bits are used to indicate the first information, and N TPC commands are used to indicate (or transmit) the transmission power of multiple second devices Control information.
  • the control information in format 3 and format 3A is group control information, that is, the first device, such as a network device, can send instruction information to multiple second devices, such as terminal devices, through one control information , Thereby avoiding waste of resources of the first device and saving power consumption of the first device.
  • control information of format 3 and format 3A is carried in the type 0 public search space. Therefore, the second device does not need to monitor the type 2 search space for receiving emergency information, so that it does not increase user complexity, reduces user power consumption, and is There are agreements with minor changes.
  • the first control information is format 3 or format 3A control information, and the first control information includes Q bits, and the Q bits are used to indicate the first information, where Q is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first control information may only be used to indicate emergency information notification, but may not be used to indicate (or transmit) transmission power control information.
  • the first device may determine second information, and the second information is used to indicate the first control information.
  • the control information includes the first information, and the second information is sent to the second device.
  • the second device can obtain the first information from the first control information after receiving the second information, thereby improving the accuracy of obtaining the emergency information notification.
  • the first control information may be format 6-1A or format 6-1B control information.
  • the bits of the resource block allocation field of the first control information are all set to 1,
  • the first field of the first control information is used to indicate the first information.
  • the control information in the format 6-1A and format 6-1B is a user-specific message, which is carried in the user-specific search space. Therefore, the second device does not need to monitor the type2 search space for receiving emergency information, so there is no need to increase User complexity reduces user power consumption.
  • the redundant state of the control information in format 6-1A and format 6-1B is used to indicate emergency information, which can avoid increasing control information overhead, thereby reducing user power consumption and improving system resource utilization. .
  • the first field may be a physical random access channel mask index (physical random access channel, PRACH mask index) field.
  • the first control information may be control information in the format 6-0B.
  • the first control information may be control information in the format 6-0A, when the bits of the resource block allocation field of the first control information are all set to 1.
  • the third field of the first control information is used to indicate the first information.
  • the control information in the format 6-0A and format 6-0B is a user-specific message, which is carried in a user-specific search space. Therefore, the second device does not need to monitor the type 2 search space for receiving emergency information, so there is no need to increase User complexity reduces user power consumption.
  • the redundant state of the control information format 6-0A and format 6-0B is used to indicate emergency information, which can avoid increasing the control information overhead, thereby reducing user power consumption and improving system resource utilization. .
  • the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the first control information may be scrambled by a first scrambling code, where the first scrambling code may be system information Wireless temporary identifier (system information radio network temporary identifier, SI-RNTI).
  • the first scrambling code may be system information Wireless temporary identifier (system information radio network temporary identifier, SI-RNTI).
  • the first control information when the CRC of the first control information is scrambled by the second scrambling code, the first control information may only include the emergency information notification or the first control information is used to indicate the first information or the first information.
  • the control information includes emergency information, where the second scrambling code may be SI-RNTI.
  • the emergency information may include one or more of the following information: ETWS information, CMAS information, and information for indicating system message changes.
  • ETWS information, CMAS information, and information used to indicate system message changes can also be called ETWS indication or ETWS notification (ETWS notification or ETWS indication), CMAS indication or CMAS notification (CMAS notification or CMAS indication), system message change indication or System message change notification (system information modification notification or system information modification indication).
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including: a second device receives first control information sent by a first device, the first control information carries first information, and the first information is used to indicate Emergency information; the first control information is format 3 control information; or, the first control information is format 3A control information; or, the first control information is format 6-0A control information; or, The first control information is control information in a format 6-0B; or, the first control information is control information in a format 6-1A; or, the first control information is control information in a format 6-1B.
  • the second device receives the emergency information according to the first information in the first control information.
  • the first device may instruct the second device to receive emergency information through control information of format 3, format 3A, format 6-0A, format 6-0B, format 6-1A, or format 6-1B.
  • the control information in the format of format 3 and format 3A is group control information, which is carried in the type 0 public search space, and the control information in the format of format 6-0A, format 6-0B, format 6-1A, and format 6-1B is
  • the user-specific message is carried in the user-specific search space, so the second device does not need to monitor the type2 search space for receiving emergency information, so that the user complexity is not increased, and the user power consumption is reduced.
  • control information in these formats used in the embodiments of the present application does not require additional bits to indicate emergency information, so it can be avoided Increasing the control information overhead can avoid reducing spectrum efficiency and increasing user power consumption.
  • control information in format 3 and format 3A is group control information, that is, the first device, such as a network device, can use one control information to send instruction information to multiple second devices, such as terminal devices, thereby avoiding This causes a waste of resources of the first device and saves power consumption of the first device.
  • the first control information is downlink control information.
  • the first control information may be format 3 or format 3A control information, and K TPC command numbers in the first control information are used to indicate the first information, where K is An integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the TPC command number may also be called TPC command, and each TPC command contains 2 bits.
  • the first information can be indicated by the TPC command of the format 3 control information or the format 3A control information, so that the first control information can indicate the first information in the case of the number of bits, so there is no need to add additional bits to indicate emergency Therefore, it can avoid increasing the control information overhead, thereby avoiding the reduction of spectrum efficiency and the increase of user power consumption
  • the control information in the format 3 and format 3A is the group control information, that is, the first device, such as the network
  • the device can send instruction information to multiple second devices, such as terminal devices, through one control information, so as to avoid waste of resources of the first device and save power consumption of the first device.
  • control information of format 3 and format 3A is carried in the type 0 public search space, so the second device does not need to monitor the type 2 search space for receiving emergency information, which can reduce user complexity and reduce user power consumption. And the changes to the existing agreement are minor.
  • the K TPC commands may not be allocated to any second device to transmit transmission power control information, but are used to indicate the first information.
  • the first control information may also include M TPC commands (or TPC command numbers), and the M TPC commands are used to indicate H transmission power control commands of the second device ,
  • M and H are integers greater than or equal to 0.
  • the K TPC commands may be predefined, or the K TPC commands may be determined by the second device by receiving high-layer signaling sent by the first device.
  • the first control information may be format 3 or format 3A control information, and Q bits other than TPC command in the first control information are used to indicate the first information, where Q is an integer greater than or equal to 1. That is, the first control information includes Q bits and N TPC commands, where Q bits are used to indicate the first information, and N TPC commands are used to indicate (or transmit) the transmission power of multiple second devices Control information.
  • the control information in format 3 and format 3A is group control information, that is, the first device, such as a network device, can send instruction information to multiple second devices, such as terminal devices, through one control information , Thereby avoiding waste of resources of the first device and saving power consumption of the first device.
  • control information of format 3 and format 3A is carried in the type 0 public search space. Therefore, the second device does not need to monitor the type 2 search space for receiving emergency information, so that it does not increase user complexity, reduces user power consumption, and is There are agreements with minor changes.
  • the first control information is format 3 or format 3A control information, and the first control information includes Q bits, and the Q bits are used to indicate the first information, where Q is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first control information may only be used to indicate emergency information notification, but may not be used to indicate (or transmit) transmission power control information.
  • the second device may receive the second information sent by the first device, and the second information is used to indicate The first control information includes the first information.
  • the second device can obtain the first information from the first control information after receiving the second information, thereby improving the accuracy of obtaining the emergency information notification.
  • the first control information may be format 6-1A or format 6-1B control information.
  • the bits of the resource block allocation field of the first control information are all set to 1,
  • the first field of the first control information is used to indicate the first information.
  • the control information in the format 6-1A and format 6-1B is a user-specific message, which is carried in the user-specific search space. Therefore, the second device does not need to monitor the type2 search space for receiving emergency information, so there is no need to increase User complexity reduces user power consumption.
  • the redundant state of the control information in format 6-1A and format 6-1B is used to indicate emergency information, which can avoid increasing control information overhead, thereby reducing user power consumption and improving system resource utilization. .
  • the first field may be a PRACH Mask index field.
  • the first control information may be control information in the format 6-0B.
  • the first control information may be control information in the format 6-0A, when the bits of the resource block allocation field of the first control information are all set to 1.
  • the third field of the first control information is used to indicate the first information.
  • the control information in the format 6-0A and format 6-0B is a user-specific message, which is carried in a user-specific search space. Therefore, the second device does not need to monitor the type 2 search space for receiving emergency information, so there is no need to increase User complexity reduces user power consumption.
  • the redundant state of the control information format 6-0A and format 6-0B is used to indicate emergency information, which can avoid increasing the control information overhead, thereby reducing user power consumption and improving system resource utilization. .
  • the CRC of the first control information may be scrambled by a first scrambling code, where the first scrambling code may be SI-RNTI.
  • the first control information when the CRC of the first control information is scrambled by the second scrambling code, the first control information may only include the emergency information notification or the first control information is used to indicate the first information or the first information.
  • the control information includes emergency information, where the second scrambling code may be SI-RNTI.
  • the emergency information may include one or more of the following information: ETWS information, CMAS information, and information for indicating system message changes.
  • ETWS information, CMAS information, and information used to indicate system message changes can also be called ETWS indication or ETWS notification (ETWS notification or ETWS indication), CMAS indication or CMAS notification (CMAS notification or CMAS indication), system message change indication or System message change notification (system information modification notification or system information modification indication).
  • this application provides a device, which may be a first device, a second device, or a chip.
  • the device has the function of implementing any one of the above-mentioned first aspect or second aspect. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • an apparatus including a processor, a communication interface, and a memory.
  • the communication interface is used to transmit information, and/or messages, and/or data between the device and other devices.
  • the memory is used to store computer-executable instructions.
  • the processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that the device executes the communication method according to the first aspect or any one of the first aspects. , Or the communication method described in the second aspect or any one of the second aspects above.
  • this application also provides a system, which includes the first device in any embodiment of the foregoing first aspect and the second device in any embodiment of the foregoing second aspect.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium having instructions stored in the computer-readable storage medium, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the methods described in the above aspects.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product including instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the methods described in the foregoing aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication method provided in this application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, the Internet of Things (IoT), the narrowband Internet of Things (NB-IoT), and the long term evolution (long term evolution).
  • LTE can also be a fifth-generation (5G) communication system
  • 5G fifth-generation
  • NR 5G new radio
  • GSM global system for mobile communication
  • GSM global system for mobile communication
  • UMTS mobile communication system
  • code division multiple access code division multiple access
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • the terminal device involved in the embodiments of the present application is a device that provides users with voice and/or data connectivity, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and the like.
  • the terminal device can also be another processing device connected to the wireless modem.
  • the terminal device can communicate with one or more core networks through a radio access network (RAN).
  • Terminal equipment can also be called wireless terminal, subscriber unit, subscriber station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, access point (access point) , Remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent), user equipment (user device), or user equipment (user equipment), etc.
  • the terminal device can be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or called a "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal.
  • a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone (or called a "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal.
  • the terminal device can be a portable, pocket-sized, handheld, built-in computer or vehicle-mounted mobile device, which is compatible with wireless The access network exchanges language and/or data.
  • the terminal device can also be a personal communication service (PCS) phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), and other equipment.
  • Common terminal devices include, for example: mobile phones, tablet computers, laptops, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, such as smart watches, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc., but this application is implemented Examples are not limited to this.
  • the network devices involved in the embodiments of the present application can be used to convert received air frames and Internet Protocol (IP) packets to each other, and serve as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, where The rest of the access network can include IP networks and so on.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the network equipment can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • the network equipment can be a base transceiver station (BTS) in the global system for mobile communication (GSM) or code division multiple access (CDMA), or it can be a broadband code division multiple access.
  • GSM global system for mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • the base station (NodeB) in (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), can also be the evolutionary base station (evolutional Node B, eNB or e-NodeB) in LTE, or the new radio controller (NR) controller), it can be the gNode B (gNB) in the 5G system, it can be a centralized unit, it can be a new wireless base station, it can be a remote radio module, it can be a micro base station, it can be a relay (relay ), which may be a distributed unit, may be a reception point (transmission reception point, TRP) or transmission point (transmission point, TP), or any other wireless access device, but the embodiment of the application is not limited thereto.
  • Network equipment can cover 1 or more cells.
  • a communication system provided in an embodiment of this application includes a network device and six terminal devices, namely UE1 to UE6.
  • UE1 to UE6 can send uplink data to a network device, and the network device can receive uplink data sent by UE1 to UE6.
  • UE4 to UE6 can also form a sub-communication system.
  • the network device can send downlink information to UE1, UE2, UE3, UE5, and UE5 can send downlink information to UE4, UE6 based on the device-to-device (D2D) technology.
  • Fig. 1 is only a schematic diagram, and does not specifically limit the type of the communication system, and the number and types of devices included in the communication system.
  • the UE may be in three states: an idle state, an inactive state (inactive), and a connected state (connected).
  • the connected state UE can communicate with the base station and transmit data through the base station dynamic scheduling, while for the idle state UE, it cannot transmit data through the base station dynamic scheduling. It needs to perform random access first, and then the data can be transmitted after the RRC connection is established. Transmission, or message 3 in the random access process, carries a small amount of uplink data.
  • the inactive state can be regarded as an intermediate state of these two states.
  • the UE and the core network retain the context of the radio resource control (RRC) message in the connected state, so it can be faster than the idle state Enter the connected state.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the fourth-generation communication system long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A) will continue to provide wireless communication services for its user equipment (UE) in the short term (or even long term).
  • enhanced machine type communication (eMTC) systems and other evolutionary systems for example, Further eMTC (FeMTC), Even Further eMTC (eFeMTC), additional MTC (AMTC)
  • eMTC enhanced machine type communication
  • FeMTC Further eMTC
  • eFeMTC Even Further eMTC
  • ATC additional MTC
  • the system, eMTC system and other evolved systems work in the LTE system and in the LTE frequency band.
  • the working bandwidth of eMTC terminals may usually be small and smaller than the working bandwidth of the LTE system.
  • the working bandwidth of eMTC terminals may be a narrowband NB, and an NB includes 6 consecutive physical resource blocks (physical resource blocks). , PRB), a PRB includes 12 subcarriers (subcarrier, SC). Due to its low power consumption, long sleep and other characteristics, the battery life of eMTC UE is long, which is expected to reach about 10 years.
  • terminal equipment obtains scheduling information by monitoring the control channel search space, and then performs data scheduling.
  • the control channel search space in LTE can be divided into a user-specific search space and a common search space.
  • the user-specific search space is configured by each user, and each user is assigned a specific search space.
  • the public search space is a search space that a group of users or users of a cell will monitor, and the public messages of the cell are generally sent.
  • only the user-specific search space and the type 0 common search space for transmitting terminal group power control are required to be detected.
  • Emergency information (such as earthquake and tsunami warning system (ETWS) information, commercial mobile alert service (CMAS) information, information used to indicate system information modification, etc.) It is carried in system messages.
  • EWS earthquake and tsunami warning system
  • CMAS commercial mobile alert service
  • the emergency information notification is in the paging message or the direct indication information, but the paging message or the direct indication information is the type 2 public search space.
  • the eMTC terminal device will not monitor the search space in the connected state, so it cannot Receive emergency message notifications in the connected state. Then the eMTC terminal device can only fall back to the idle state to receive the paging message or directly indicate the information to receive the emergency information notification, and then receive the emergency information, which causes a longer delay and increases the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • a possible solution is to allow connected eMTC terminal devices to monitor both the type 2 search space and user-specific search space at the same time, that is, allow eMTC terminal devices to receive paging messages or direct indication information when connected.
  • the paging message and the user-specific search space may be located on different narrowbands, the connected eMTC terminal device needs to monitor two narrowbands at the same time, which seriously increases user complexity and user power consumption.
  • this approach has greatly changed the existing agreement.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to solve the problem of high complexity and high power consumption when receiving an emergency message notification in a connected eMTC terminal device in the prior art.
  • the method and the device are based on the same inventive concept. Because the method and the device have similar principles for solving the problem, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and the repetitive parts will not be repeated.
  • Fig. 2 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by this application.
  • the method can be applied to the terminal equipment in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and the method includes:
  • the first device determines first control information.
  • the first control information carries first information, and the first information is used to indicate emergency information; the first control information is format 3 control information; or, the first control information is format3A Or, the first control information is control information of format6-0A; or, the first control information is control information of format6-0B; or, the first control information is control information of format6-1A Information; or, the first control information is control information of format6-1B.
  • the emergency information may include one or more of the following information: ETWS information, CMAS information, and information for indicating system information and modification.
  • ETWS information, CMAS information, and information used to indicate system message changes may also be called ETWS indication or ETWS notification (ETWS notification or ETWS indication), CMAS indication or CMAS notification (CMAS notification or CMAS indication), Message change indication or system message change notification (system information modification notification or system information modification indication).
  • the first control information may be downlink control information in the LTE eMTC system, downlink control information in the NR system, etc., which is not specifically limited here.
  • the following takes the first control information as downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) as an example.
  • the type of emergency information and/or notification of emergency information may be specifically indicated.
  • the first device may also indicate that there is no emergency information through the first control information.
  • the first device may be a network device, and the second device is a terminal device.
  • the first device may also be a terminal device, and the second device may be a network device.
  • the first device may also be another device with sending capability, and the second device may be another device with receiving capability.
  • S202 The first device sends the first control information to the second device.
  • the second device receives the first control information.
  • S203 The first device sends the emergency information to the second device.
  • S204 The second device receives the emergency information according to the first information in the first control information.
  • the first device may instruct the second device to receive emergency information through control information of format 3, format 3A, format 6-0A, format 6-0B, format 6-1A, or format 6-1B.
  • the control information in the format of format 3 and format 3A is group control information, which is carried in the type 0 public search space, and the control information in the format of format 6-0A, format 6-0B, format 6-1A, and format 6-1B is
  • the user-specific message is carried in the user-specific search space, so the second device does not need to monitor the type2 search space for receiving emergency information, so that the user complexity is not increased, and the user power consumption is reduced.
  • control information in these formats used in the embodiments of the present application does not require additional bits to indicate emergency information, so it can be avoided Increasing the control information overhead can avoid reducing spectrum efficiency and increasing user power consumption.
  • control information in format 3 and format 3A is group control information, that is, the first device, such as a network device, can use one control information to send instruction information to multiple second devices, such as terminal devices, thereby avoiding This causes a waste of resources of the first device and saves power consumption of the first device.
  • the first control information may be format 3 or format 3A control information, and K transmission power control command numbers (TPC command numbers) in the first control information Used to indicate the first information, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the K TPC command numbers may not be allocated to any second device to transmit transmission power control information, but are used to indicate the first information.
  • the first downlink control information may also include M TPC command numbers, and the M TPC command numbers are used to indicate M transmission power control commands of the second device, or the M TPCs
  • the command number is used to indicate H transmission power control commands of the second device, M is an integer greater than or equal to 0, and H is an integer greater than M.
  • the first control information may include K+M TPC command numbers, where K TPC command numbers are used to indicate the first information, and the remaining M TPC command numbers are still used to indicate transmission power control commands.
  • one TPC command number of the remaining M TPC command numbers may indicate one transmission power control command of the second device, or may indicate transmission power control commands of multiple second devices.
  • TPC command number can also be called TPC command.
  • Each TPC command contains 2 bits. For the convenience of description, the following are collectively referred to as TPC command.
  • the K TPC commands may be predefined.
  • the first device and the second device predefine the number, index, number, etc. of the K TPC commands.
  • the K TPC commands are determined by the first device and configured to the second device through high-layer signaling, for example, the first device can be configured through system information or radio resource control (RRC)
  • RRC radio resource control
  • High-level signaling such as signaling or media access control control element (MAC CE) signaling configures the number, index, and number of K TPC commands.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC CE media access control control element
  • TPC command includes two bits, so TPC command includes four value states, namely "00", “01”, “10", and "11". Any two value states can be selected to indicate the first information respectively.
  • the third information such as 00 indicates that the third information has no emergency information, and 01 indicates that the first information has emergency information, as shown in Table 1.
  • 00 indicates the third information (that is, there is no emergency information)
  • 01 indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the emergency information is ETWS notification
  • 10 indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the emergency information is a CMAS notification, as shown in Table 2.
  • four value states can be used to indicate the first information and the third information respectively, for example, 00 indicates the third information (ie no emergency information), 01 indicates the first information (ie there is emergency information) and the emergency information is ETWS Notification, 10 indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the emergency information is a CMAS notification, and 11 indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the emergency information is a system information modification notification, as shown in Table 3-1.
  • 2 bits can also be used to indicate the first information and the third information.
  • one of the two bits is used to indicate the ETWS notification
  • the other bit of the two bits is used to indicate the CMAS notification
  • 0 means that there is no such type.
  • Emergency information, 1 means there is emergency information of this type.
  • high-order bits indicate CMAS notification
  • low-order bits indicate CMAS notification
  • Table 3-2 00 indicates third information (that is, there is no emergency information, that is, there is neither ETWS notification nor CMAS notification)
  • 01 indicates The first information (ie there is emergency information) and the emergency information is an ETWS notification
  • 10 indicates the first information (ie there is emergency information) and the emergency information is a CMAS notification
  • 11 indicates the first information (ie there is emergency information) and the emergency information is ETWS Notification and CMAS notification are shown in Table 3-3.
  • Bit 1 (low bit) 2 (high bit) meaning ETWS notification CMAS notification
  • two TPC commands include 4 bits, of which 3 bits can be used to indicate the first information and the third information, for example, the first bit (the most significant bit) of the 3 bits is used to indicate ETWS notification, the second bit of the 3 bits (the middle bit) is used to indicate the CMAS notification, and the third bit (the least significant bit) of the 3 bits is used to indicate the system message change, as shown in Table 3-4 Shown.
  • the first bit (the most significant bit) of the 3 bits is used to indicate ETWS notification
  • the second bit of the 3 bits (the middle bit) is used to indicate the CMAS notification
  • the third bit (the least significant bit) of the 3 bits is used to indicate the system message change, as shown in Table 3-4 Shown.
  • 0 means that there is no emergency information of this type
  • 1 means that there is emergency information of this type.
  • 000 indicates the third information (ie there is no emergency information)
  • 010 indicates the first information (ie there is emergency information) and the emergency information is CMAS notification
  • 100 indicates the first information (ie there is emergency information) and the emergency information is an ETWS notification
  • 110 Indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the emergency information is ETWS notification and CMAS notification
  • 111 indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the emergency information is ETWS notification, CMAS notification, and system information modification notification
  • 001 indicates the first Information (that is, there is emergency information) and the emergency information is system information modification notification
  • 101 indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the emergency information is ETWS notification and system information modification notification
  • 011 indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information)
  • the emergency information is CMAS notification and system information modification notification, as shown in Table 3-5.
  • Tables 1 to 3-5 are only exemplary descriptions, and do not describe the type of emergency information indicated by the first information, the value status corresponding to the first information, and the value status corresponding to the third information. Specific restrictions. At the same time, it should be understood that the specific meaning corresponding to the different bits or different states in the above table is not specifically limited, as long as the number of bits included and the indicated content are the same as the method provided in the embodiment of this application, it is implemented in this application. Examples of protected content.
  • the first control information may be format 3 or format 3A control information, and Q bits other than TPC command in the first control information are used to indicate the first information, where Q is An integer greater than or equal to 1. That is, the first control information includes Q bits and N TPC commands, where Q bits are used to indicate the first information, and N TPC commands are used to indicate (or transmit) the transmission of multiple second devices Power control information.
  • the first control information only includes Q bits. In this case, the first control information may be used to indicate emergency information notification, but may not be used to indicate (or transmit) transmission power control information.
  • Q can be equal to 1, and the 1 bit has two value states, namely "0" and "1". Therefore, when the value of this bit is 0, the first information can be indicated (that is, there is emergency Information). In addition, when the bit value is 1, it can also indicate third information (that is, there is no emergency information). Or, when the value of the added one bit is 1, it can indicate the first information (that is, there is emergency information), and when the value of this bit is 0, it can also indicate the third information (that is, there is no emergency information).
  • Q can also be equal to 2, and the 2 bits have four value states, namely "00", "01", “10", and "11". Therefore, the first information can be indicated by the added 2 bits
  • the way to indicate the first information by adding two bits can refer to the TPC command way to indicate the first information through different value states, as shown in Table 1 to Table 3-1, which will not be repeated here. Repeat.
  • the two bits can be used to indicate the two types of emergency information, and the two bits can respectively indicate the two types of emergency information.
  • the TPC command through 2 bits indicate two types of emergency information modes, as shown in Table 3-2 to Table 3-3, which will not be repeated here.
  • Q can also be equal to 3.
  • 3 bits indicate the first information and the third information
  • three types of emergency information can be indicated by three bits, and the three bits can indicate two types of emergency information.
  • the TPC command indicates three types of emergency information through 3 bits, as shown in Table 3-4 to Table 3-5, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first device may also determine second information, and the second information is used to indicate the first control information Including the first information, and sending the second information to the second device. Therefore, after receiving the second information, the second device can determine to acquire the first information in the first control information.
  • the first control information may also be control information in format 6-1A or format 6-1B, when all bits of the resource block assignment field (resource block assignment) of the first control information When set to 1, the first field of the first control information may be used to indicate the first information.
  • the first field may be a physical random access channel mask index (physical random access channel mask index, PRACH mask index) field.
  • the first field may indicate that there is emergency information when the value is 13 or 14 or 15. Or the first field can select any two value states from 13, 14, and 15 to indicate two emergency information notifications respectively.
  • the two emergency information notifications can be any two of ETWS notification, CMAS notification, and system info modification notification.
  • An emergency information notification, such as 13 indicates ETWS notification, 14 indicates CMAS notification.
  • the first field can indicate three emergency information notifications respectively through the three value states of 13, 14, and 15, where the three emergency information notifications can be ETWS notifications, CMAS notifications, and system info modification notifications, such as 13 It indicates ETWS notification, 14 indicates CMAS notification, and 15 indicates system info modification notification, as shown in Table 4.
  • the first field may indicate emergency information when the value is 7 or 8 or 9.
  • the first field can select any two value states from 7, 8, and 9 to indicate two emergency information notifications respectively, where the two emergency information notifications can be any two of the ETWS notification, CMAS notification, and system info modification notification.
  • An emergency information notification such as 7 indicates ETWS notification, 8 indicates CMAS notification.
  • the first field can indicate three emergency information notifications respectively through the three value states of 7, 8, and 9, where the three emergency information notifications can be ETWS notifications, CMAS notifications, and system info modification notifications, such as 7 It indicates ETWS notification, 8 indicates CMAS notification, and 9 indicates system info modification notification, as shown in Table 4.
  • the first control information may be control information in the format 6-0B.
  • the bits of the MCS field of the first control information are all set to 1, the first control information
  • the second field is used to indicate the first information.
  • the second field may be any field in the first control information except the MCS field and the uplink and downlink distinction flag bit (Flag for format 6-0B/format 6-1B differentiation).
  • the second field may indicate the first information through different states. Specifically, the second field may indicate the first information through the first state, where the first state may include one or more states. If the first state includes a state, the state may indicate the first information (that is, there is emergency information). If the first state includes two states, the two states may respectively indicate two types of emergency information notifications, and if the first state includes three states, the three states may respectively indicate three types of emergency information notifications. Wherein, each state in the first state may include at least one bit whose value is 1.
  • the first field is used as the repetition number field.
  • the repetition number field can indicate the first information through a value state. For example, when the repetition number field has a value of 111, it indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information).
  • the repetition number field can indicate the first information through two value states. For example, when the repetition number field is 111, it indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information), and the type of the emergency information is ETWS, and the repetition number field takes the value 110 hours indicate the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of emergency information is CMAS.
  • the repetition number field can indicate the first information through three value states.
  • the repetition number field when the repetition number field has a value of 111, it indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of emergency information is ETWS, and the repetition number field has a value of At 110, it indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of emergency information is CMAS.
  • the repetition number field When the repetition number field is 100, it indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of emergency information is system info modification. It should be noted that this is only an exemplary description, and does not specifically describe the type of the first field, the number of states included in the first state, the type of emergency information, and the value status corresponding to each type of emergency information. limited.
  • the second field may use different bits to indicate the first information.
  • the second field uses different bits to indicate the first information.
  • the TPC command uses different bits to indicate two types of emergency information.
  • the second field uses two bits to indicate two types of emergency information.
  • the second field uses 3 bits to indicate two types of emergency information.
  • the TPC command to indicate three types of emergency information with 3 bits, as shown in Table 3-4 to Table 3-5. I will not repeat them here.
  • the first control information may be control information in the format 6-0A.
  • the first control information may be control information in the format 6-0A.
  • the third field may be any field in the first control information except resource block assignment and uplink and downlink distinction fields (Flag for format 6-0A/format 6-1A differentiation).
  • the third field may indicate the first information through different states. Specifically, the third field may indicate the first information through the first state, where the first state may include one or more states. If the first state includes a state, the state may indicate the first information (that is, there is emergency information). If the first state includes two states, the two states can respectively indicate two types of emergency information, and if the first state includes three states, the three states can respectively indicate three types of emergency information. Wherein, each state in the first state may include at least one bit whose value is 1.
  • the MCS field can indicate the first information through a value state. For example, when the value of the MCS field is 111, it indicates the first information (that is, there is Emergency information).
  • the MCS field can indicate the first information through two value states. For example, when the value of the MCS field is 111, it indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of emergency information is ETWS, and the value of the MCS field is 110.
  • the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of emergency information is CMAS.
  • the MCS field can indicate the first information through three value states.
  • the value of the MCS field when the value of the MCS field is 111, it indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of emergency information is ETWS, and the value of the MCS field is 110.
  • the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of the emergency information is CMAS.
  • the MCS field value is 100, it indicates the first information (that is, there is emergency information) and the type of the emergency information is system info modification. It should be noted that this is only an exemplary description, and does not specifically describe the type of the first field, the number of states included in the first state, the type of emergency information, and the value status corresponding to each type of emergency information. limited.
  • the third field may use different bits to indicate the first information.
  • the third field uses different bits to indicate the first information.
  • the TPC command uses different bits to indicate two types of emergency information.
  • the third field uses two bits to indicate two types of emergency information.
  • the third field uses 3 bits to indicate two types of emergency information.
  • the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the first control information may be scrambled by the first scrambling code, where the first scrambling code
  • a scrambling code may be a system information radio network temporary identifier (SI-RNTI).
  • the first control information when the CRC of the first control information is scrambled by the second scrambling code, the first control information may only include emergency information notification or the first control information may include emergency information notification or the first control information
  • the second scrambling code may be SI-RNTI.
  • the remaining bits in the first control information are all set to the first state, for example, all are set to 1 or all are set to 0. In this way, the first state can be used to further detect whether the DCI is correct and reduce the probability of false alarms.
  • the fourth field in the first control information may be used to indicate the first information, and the fourth field may be the first Any field in the control information.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device.
  • the structure of the communication device may be as shown in FIG. 3, including a processing unit 301 and a transceiver unit 302.
  • the device is specifically used to implement the function of the first device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the device may be the first device itself, or the chip or chipset or the chip in the first device. Used to perform part of the related method function.
  • the processing unit 301 is configured to determine first control information, where the first control information carries first information, and the first information is used to indicate emergency information; the first control information is format 3 control information; Or, the first control information is control information in format 3A; or, the first control information is control information in format 6-0A; or, the first control information is control information in format 6-0B; or , The first control information is control information in format 6-1A; or, the first control information is control information in format 6-1B.
  • the transceiver unit 302 is configured to send the first control information determined by the processing unit 301 to a second device; and send the emergency information to the second device.
  • the emergency information may include one or more of the following information: ETWS notification, CMAS notification, and notification for indicating system message changes.
  • the first control information is format 3 or format 3A control information
  • K TPC command numbers in the first control information may be used to indicate the first information, where K is greater than Or an integer equal to 1.
  • the K TPC command numbers may be predefined, or the K TPC command numbers may be determined by the first device and configured to the second device through higher layer signaling.
  • the first control information is format 3 or format 3A control information
  • Q bits other than the TPC command number in the first control information may be used to indicate the first information, Where Q is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 301 may also be used to determine second information before the transceiver unit 302 sends the first control information to the second device, and the second information is used to indicate The first control information includes the first information.
  • the transceiving unit 302 may also be configured to send the second information determined by the processing unit 301 to the second device.
  • the first control information is control information of format 6-1A or format 6-1B, and when all bits of the resource block allocation field of the first control information are set to 1, the The first field of the first control information may be used to indicate the first information.
  • the first field may be a PRACH Mask index field.
  • the first control information is control information in the format 6-0B.
  • the first control information is control information in the format 6-0A.
  • the first control information is control information in the format 6-0A, and when the bits of the resource block allocation field of the first control information are all set to 1,
  • the third field of the first control information may be used to indicate the first information.
  • the CRC of the first control information is scrambled by SI-RNTI.
  • the device is specifically used to implement the function of the second device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the device may be the second device itself, or a chip or chipset or chip in the second device. Part of the function used to perform related methods.
  • the transceiver unit 302 is configured to receive data; the processing unit 301 is configured to control the transceiver unit 302 to receive first control information sent by a first device, where the first control information carries first information, and the first The information is used to indicate emergency information; the first control information is control information in format 3; or, the first control information is control information in format 3A; or, the first control information is control information in format 6-0A Information; or, the first control information is control information in the format 6-0B; or, the first control information is control information in the format 6-1A; or, the first control information is in the format 6-1B Control information; and, controlling the transceiver unit 302 to receive the emergency information according to the first information in the first control information.
  • the emergency information may include one or more of the following information: ETWS notification, CMAS notification, and notification for indicating system message changes.
  • the first control information is format 3 or format 3A control information
  • K TPC command numbers in the first control information may be used to indicate the first information, where K is greater than Or an integer equal to 1.
  • the K TPC command numbers may be predefined, or the K TPC command numbers may also be determined by the second device by receiving high-layer signaling sent by the first device.
  • the first control information is format 3 or format 3A control information
  • Q bits in the first control information may be used to indicate the first information, where Q is greater than or An integer equal to 1.
  • the processing unit 301 may also be used to: before controlling the transceiver unit 302 to receive the first control information sent by the first device, control the transceiver unit 302 to receive the first control information sent by the first device. Second information, where the second information is used to indicate that the first control information includes the first information.
  • the first control information is control information of format 6-1A or format 6-1B, and when all bits of the resource block allocation field of the first control information are set to 1, the The first field of the first control information may be used to indicate the first information.
  • the first field may be a PRACH Mask index field.
  • the first control information is control information in the format 6-0B.
  • the first control information is control information in the format 6-0A.
  • the first control information is control information in the format 6-0A, and when the bits of the resource block allocation field of the first control information are all set to 1,
  • the third field of the first control information may be used to indicate the first information.
  • the CRC of the first control information is scrambled by SI-RNTI.
  • This application provides another communication method.
  • the method can be applied to the terminal equipment in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and the method includes:
  • one downlink control information schedules one transport block (TB) or schedules multiple transport blocks.
  • the DCI also indicates a hybrid automatic retransmission request (HARQ) process number.
  • HARQ hybrid automatic retransmission request
  • UE user equipment
  • the DCI uses 3 bits to indicate the HARQ process number used by the TB scheduled by the DCI from 0 to 7.
  • the DCI also indicates whether the data transmission scheduled by the DCI carries a newly transmitted TB or a retransmitted TB.
  • one DCI can be used to schedule multiple TBs.
  • the DCI can indicate multiple HARQ process numbers, where each HARQ process number corresponds to or is associated with the transmission of one transmission block.
  • the HARQ process number of the block is 1, 2, ..., N-1.
  • N bits are required to indicate the new data indicator (NDI) information of each transmission block in a bitmap manner, and N bits are also needed to indicate each transmission block in a bitmap manner.
  • N bits are also needed to indicate each transmission block in a bitmap manner.
  • An information processing method characterized in that it comprises:
  • the terminal device receives downlink control information from the network device, where the downlink control information can schedule at most N transmission blocks TB, and the N is a positive integer;
  • the first field includes (N+2) bits b 0 , b 1 , ..., b N+1 ;
  • the terminal device determines the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the first field, where the L is a positive integer and 1 is a positive integer;
  • the k 0, the bit state of the b j bit in the first field is 1, and the L consecutive bits b j+1 , b j+2 ,..., b N+1 in the first field carry all
  • the new data of L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information indicates NDI information
  • the k L+1, the bit state of the b L bit in the first field is 1, and the L consecutive bits b 0 , b 1 ,..., b L-1 in the first field carry all NDI information of the L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information;
  • the terminal device sends the L TBs or receives the L TBs according to the determined HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs and the NDI information of each TB in the L TBs.
  • the terminal device uses the b 0 bit as the start bit, determines that the b i bit is the first bit in the (N+2) bits whose status is 1, and the HARQ process number of the first TB is i.
  • the terminal device determines the HARQ process numbers of other TBs in the L TBs except the first TB according to the first association relationship between the HARQ process numbers of the first TB and the process numbers of the L HARQ processes, so
  • the first TB is one of the L TBs, and the L HARQ processes are HARQ processes corresponding to the L TBs;
  • the terminal device uses the b L+1 bit as the start bit, and determines that the b i bit is the first bit in the (N+2) bits whose status is 1, and the HARQ process number of the first TB is iL- 1.
  • the terminal device determines the HARQ of other TBs in the L TBs except the first TB according to the first association relationship between the HARQ process numbers of the first TB and the process numbers of the L HARQ processes Process number, the first TB is one of the L TBs, and the L HARQ processes are HARQ processes corresponding to the L TBs.
  • the NDI information of each TB in the L TBs is determined according to the L bits b 0 , b 1 , ..., b L-1 in a bitmap manner.
  • the terminal device determines whether the downlink control information includes the first field according to the first bit in the downlink control information, where the first bit is 1 bit;
  • the bit state of the first bit is 1, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information includes the first field, and the N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the terminal device determines whether the downlink control information includes the first field according to the first bit in the downlink control information, where the first bit is 1 bit;
  • the bit state of the first bit is 0, and the terminal device determines that the downlink control information does not include the first field;
  • the terminal device determines that the downlink control information includes a second bit, where the second bit is 1 bit;
  • the bit state of the second bit is 1, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and all TBs scheduled by the downlink control information are It is a newly transmitted TB, or all TBs scheduled by the downlink control information are retransmitted TBs; or,
  • the bit state of the second bit is 1, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and the downlink control information scheduling includes a second field And/or a third field, the second field is used to indicate the HARQ process number and/or the first identification information of the maximum N TBs, and the third field is used to indicate the second identification information;
  • the bit state of the second bit is 0, and the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can only schedule 1 TB; or,
  • the bit state of the second bit is 0, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can only schedule 1 TB or 2 TB, and the downlink control information includes the fourth field and/or the fifth field, so The fourth field is used to indicate HARQ process number and/or NDI information, and the fifth field is used to indicate redundancy version (Redundancy Version, RV);
  • the bit state of the second bit is 0, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can only schedule a maximum of 2 TBs, and the downlink control information includes a third field and/or a fourth field, and the third field
  • the field is used to indicate HARQ process number and/or NDI information
  • the fourth field is used to indicate redundancy version (Redundancy Version, RV).
  • the terminal device determines whether the downlink control information includes the first field according to the first bit in the downlink control information, where the first bit is 1 bit;
  • the bit state of the first bit is 0, and the terminal device determines that the downlink control information does not include the first field;
  • the terminal device Determining, by the terminal device, that the downlink control information includes a second bit, where the second bit is 1 bit;
  • the bit state of the second bit is 1, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and all TBs scheduled by the downlink control information are It is a newly transmitted TB, or all TBs scheduled by the downlink control information are retransmitted TBs; or,
  • the bit state of the second bit is 1, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and the downlink control information scheduling includes a second field And/or the third field, the second field is used to indicate the HARQ process number and/or the first identification information of the maximum N TBs, the third field is used to indicate the second identification information, the terminal device Determine the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the second field, where the L is a positive integer, and 1 positive L ⁇ N;
  • the bit state of the second bit is 0, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information further includes a third bit, the third bit is 1 bit, and the bit state of the third bit is fixed to 1;
  • the terminal device determines according to the third bit that the downlink control information can only schedule 1 or 2 TBs.
  • An information processing method characterized by comprising:
  • the network device determines the number L of transmission blocks TB scheduled by the downlink control information, where the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, the N is a positive integer, the L is a positive integer, and 1 is a positive integer;
  • the network device determines that the new data of the L TBs indicate NDI information
  • the network device sends the downlink control information to the terminal device, the downlink control information can schedule a new transmission TB and a retransmission TB at the same time, the downlink control information includes a first field, and the first field includes (N+ 2) Bits b 0 , b 1 ,..., b N+1 ;
  • the k 0, and the bit state of the b j bit in the first field is 1, and the L consecutive bits b j+1 , b j+2 ,..., b N+1 in the first field carry NDI information of L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information;
  • the k L+1, and the bit state of the b L bit in the first field is 1, and the L consecutive bits b 0 , b 1 ,..., b L-1 in the first field carry NDI information of L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information;
  • the network device sends the L TBs or receives the L TBs according to the downlink control information.
  • the network device determines one of the first fields according to the corresponding relationship between the bit status of the first field and the HARQ process number of the first TB in the L and L TBs and the NDI information of each TB in the L TBs Or multiple bit states, the first TB is one of the L TBs.
  • the network device determines that the HARQ process number of the first TB is i, the first TB is the first TB in the L TBs, and OB is the first to determine that the network device is
  • the b 0 bit is used as the start bit, and the network device determines that the bit status of the b i bit in the first field is 1, and the b 0 , b 1 ,..., b j-1 other than the b i bit
  • the bit states of j-1 bits of are all 0; or,
  • the network device determines that the HARQ process number of the first TB is iL-1, the first TB is the first TB in the L TBs, and L+1 is for determining the first TB
  • the network device uses the b L+1 bit as the starting bit, the network device determines that the bit status of the b i bit in the first field is 1, the network device determines that the b L+1 , b L +2, ..., b N + 1 b i bits except the outer j-1 other bits of the status bits are zero.
  • the network device determines that the bit state of the b N+1-L bit in the first field is 1; or,
  • the network device determines that the bit state of the b L bit in the first field is 1.
  • the network device uses L bits to indicate the NDI information of each of the L TBs in a bitmap manner, and the L bits are b j+1 , b j+2 ,... in the first field. , B N+1 ; or,
  • the network device uses L bits to indicate the NDI information of each of the L TBs in a bitmap manner, and the L bits are b 0 , b 1 ,..., b L- in the first field. 1 .
  • the network device determines that the downlink control information can schedule a new transmission TB and a retransmission TB at the same time, the network device determines that the downlink control information includes the first field, and the network device sets the downlink control information
  • the bit state of the first bit in is 1, where the first bit is 1 bit.
  • the network device determines that the TB that can be scheduled by the downlink control information can only be all newly transmitted TBs, or the network device determines that the TB that can be scheduled by the downlink control information can only be all retransmitted TBs, the network The device determines that the downlink control information does not include the first field; or,
  • the network device determines that the downlink control information includes the second field and/or the third field, the network device determines that the downlink control information does not include the first field;
  • the network device sets the bit state of the first bit in the downlink control information to 0, where the first bit is 1 bit.
  • the network device sets the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 1; or,
  • the network device sets the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 1;
  • the network device sets the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 0;
  • the second bit is 1 bit.
  • the network device sets the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 1, where: The second bit is 1 bit; or,
  • the network device sets the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 1, where the second bit is 1 bit;
  • the network device determines that the downlink control information further includes a third bit, and the third bit is 1 bit, and the network device sets the The bit state of the third bit is 0.
  • a terminal device characterized in that the terminal device includes a processing module and a transceiver module, wherein:
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive downlink control information from a network device, where the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N transmission blocks TB, and the N is a positive integer;
  • the processing module is configured to determine that when the downlink control information includes a first field, the first field includes (N+2) bits b 0 , b 1 , ..., b N+1 ;
  • the k 0, the bit state of the b j bit in the first field is 1, and the L consecutive bits b j+1 , b j+2 ,..., b N+1 in the first field carry all
  • the new data of L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information indicates NDI information
  • the k L+1, the bit state of the b L bit in the first field is 1, and the L consecutive bits b 0 , b 1 ,..., b L-1 in the first field carry all NDI information of the L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information;
  • the processing module is configured to determine the HARQ process number of each of the L TBs
  • the transceiver module is configured to send the L TBs or receive the L TBs according to the determined HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs and the NDI information of each TB in the L TBs. TB.
  • the first TB is one of the L TBs.
  • the processing module is configured to use the b 0 bit as the start bit to determine that the b i bit is the first one of the (N+2) bits. If the bit status is 1, the HARQ process number of the first TB is i, and it is determined according to the first association relationship between the HARQ process numbers of the first TB and the process numbers of the L HARQ processes to divide the L TB HARQ process numbers of other TBs other than the first TB, the first TB is one of the L TBs, and the L HARQ processes are HARQ processes corresponding to the L TBs; or The b L+1 bit is used as the starting bit, and it is determined that the b i bit is the bit with the first bit status of 1 among the (N+2) bits, and the HARQ process number of the first TB is iL-1.
  • the first association relationship between the HARQ process numbers of the first TB and the process numbers of the L HARQ processes determines the HARQ process numbers of the TBs other than the first TB in the L TBs, and the first TB is For one TB in the L TBs, the L HARQ processes are HARQ processes corresponding to the L TBs.
  • the NDI information of each TB in the L TBs is determined according to the L bits b 0 , b 1 , ..., b L-1 in a bitmap manner.
  • the processing module is configured to determine whether the downlink control information includes all the downlink control information according to the first bit in the downlink control information.
  • the first bit is 1 bit; the bit status of the first bit is 1, it is determined that the downlink control information includes the first field, and the N is a positive value greater than 1. Integer.
  • the processing module is configured to determine whether the downlink control information includes all the downlink control information according to the first bit in the downlink control information.
  • the first bit is 1 bit; the bit status of the first bit is 0, and it is determined that the downlink control information does not include the first field;
  • the downlink control information includes a second bit, where the second bit is 1 bit;
  • the bit state of the second bit is 1, and it is determined that the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and all TBs scheduled by the downlink control information are newly transmitted TBs , Or all TBs scheduled by the downlink control information are retransmission TBs; or,
  • the bit state of the second bit is 1, and it is determined that the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and the downlink control information scheduling includes a second field and/or a second field. Three fields, the second field is used to indicate the HARQ process number and/or the first identification information of the maximum N TBs, and the third field is used to indicate the second identification information; or,
  • the bit state of the second bit is 0, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can only schedule 1 TB or 2 TB, and the downlink control information includes the fourth field and/or the fifth field, so The fourth field is used to indicate HARQ process number and/or NDI information, and the fifth field is used to indicate redundancy version (Redundancy Version, RV);
  • the bit status of the second bit is 0, and it is determined that the downlink control information can only schedule 1 TB or 2 TBs.
  • the processing module is configured to determine whether the downlink control information includes all the downlink control information according to the first bit in the downlink control information.
  • the first field wherein the first bit is 1 bit; the bit status of the first bit is 0, it is determined that the downlink control information does not include the first field; it is determined that the downlink control information includes the second Bit, where the second bit is 1 bit; the bit status of the second bit is 1, it is determined that the downlink control information can schedule up to N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and All TBs scheduled by the downlink control information are newly transmitted TBs, or all TBs scheduled by the downlink control information are retransmitted TBs; or, if the bit state of the second bit is 0, it is determined that the downlink control information is still transmitted Including the third bit, the third bit is 1 bit, and the bit status of the third bit is fixed to 1; it is determined according to the third bit that the downlink control information can only schedule 1
  • a network device characterized by comprising: a processing module and a transceiver module, wherein:
  • the processing module is configured to determine the number L of transmission block TBs scheduled for downlink control information, wherein the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, the N is a positive integer, the L is a positive integer, and 1 is a positive integer ,
  • the processing module is configured to determine the HARQ process numbers of the L TBs
  • the processing module is configured to determine that the new data of the L TBs indicate NDI information
  • the transceiver module is configured to send the downlink control information to a terminal device, the downlink control information can schedule a new transmission TB and a retransmission TB at the same time, the downlink control information includes a first field, and the first field includes (N+2) bits b 0 , b 1 ,..., b N+1 ;
  • the k 0, and the bit state of the b j bit in the first field is 1, and the L consecutive bits b j+1 , b j+2 ,..., b N+1 in the first field carry NDI information of L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information;
  • the k L+1, and the bit state of the b L bit in the first field is 1, and the L consecutive bits b 0 , b 1 ,..., b L-1 in the first field carry NDI information of L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information;
  • the transceiver module is configured to send the L TBs or receive the L TBs according to the downlink control information.
  • the processing module is configured to compare the HARQ process number of the first TB among the L and L TBs and each of the L TBs according to the bit status of the first field.
  • the correspondence between the NDI information of each TB determines one or more bit states in the first field, and the first TB is one of the L TBs.
  • the processing module is configured to use L bits to indicate the NDI information of each of the L TBs in a bitmap manner, so The L bits are b j+1 , b j+2 ,..., b N+1 in the first field; or, L bits are used to indicate the value of each of the L TBs in a bitmap manner NDI information, the L bits are b 0 , b 1 ,..., b L-1 in the first field.
  • the network device according to any one of claims 26 to 30, wherein the processing module is configured to determine that the downlink control information can schedule a new transmission TB and a retransmission TB at the same time.
  • the downlink control information includes the first field, and the bit state of the first bit in the downlink control information is set to 1, where the first bit is 1 bit.
  • the processing module is configured to determine that the TBs that can be scheduled by the downlink control information can only be when all newly transmitted TBs are available, or determine The TB that can be scheduled by the downlink control information can only be all retransmission TBs, or when it is determined that the downlink control information includes the second field and/or the third field, it is determined that the downlink control information does not include the first field; Set the bit status of the first bit in the downlink control information to 0, where the first bit is 1 bit.
  • the processing module is used when the downlink control information schedules multiple newly transmitted TBs, or the downlink control information schedules multiple retransmission TBs or determines
  • the downlink control information includes the second field and/or the third field, set the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 1; when the downlink control information can only schedule 1 TB or 2 TBs , Set the bit status of the second bit in the downlink control information to 0; wherein, the second bit is 1 bit.
  • the processing module is used when the downlink control information schedules multiple newly transmitted TBs, or the downlink control information schedules multiple retransmission TBs, or When it is determined that the downlink control information includes the second field and/or the third field, set the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 1, where the second bit is 1 bit; the downlink When the control information can only schedule 1 TB or 2 TBs, it is determined that the downlink control information further includes a third bit, the third bit is 1 bit, and the bit status of the third bit is set to 0.
  • the processing module is used when the downlink control information schedules multiple newly transmitted TBs, or the downlink control information schedules multiple retransmission TBs, Set the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 1; when the downlink control information can only schedule 1 TB, set the bit state of the second bit in the downlink control information to 0; The second bit is 1 bit.
  • the bit state of the second bit is 1, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and the downlink control information scheduling includes a second field And/or the third field, the second field is used to indicate the HARQ process number and/or the first identification information of the maximum N TBs, the third field is used to indicate the second identification information, and the method further include:
  • the terminal device determines the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the second field, where L is a positive integer and 1 is a positive integer;
  • the second field includes 8 or 9 bits, and the HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs is determined in a bitmap manner according to the second field;
  • the terminal device sends the L TBs or receives the L TBs according to the determined HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs and the NDI information of each TB in the L TBs.
  • the third field includes 1 bit.
  • the NDIs of the L TBs are the same;
  • the bit state of the second bit is 0, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can only schedule 1 TB or 2 TB, and the downlink control information includes the fourth field and/or the fifth field, so The fourth field is used to indicate HARQ process number and/or NDI information, the fifth field is used to indicate redundancy version (Redundancy Version, RV), and the method further includes:
  • the terminal device determines the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the fourth field, where the L is a positive integer and 1 is a positive integer;
  • the terminal device determines the HARQ process number of the L TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the fourth field;
  • the terminal device sends the L TBs or receives the L TBs according to the determined HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs and the NDI information of each TB in the L TBs.
  • the terminal device determines redundancy version information according to the fifth field and/or the fourth field.
  • the fourth field includes 7 bits or the fourth field includes 9 bits; and/or,
  • the fifth field includes 2 bits.
  • the bit state of the second bit is 1, the terminal device determines that the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, where N is a positive integer greater than 1, and the downlink control information scheduling includes a second field And/or the third field, the second field is used to indicate the HARQ process number and/or the first identification information of the maximum N TBs, the third field is used to indicate the second identification information, and the method further include:
  • the terminal device determines the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the second field, where L is a positive integer and 1 is a positive integer;
  • the second field includes 8 or 9 bits, and the HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs is determined in a bitmap manner according to the second field;
  • the terminal device sends the L TBs or receives the L TBs according to the determined HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs and the NDI information of each TB in the L TBs.
  • the network device may determine the scheduling information of one or more TBs according to the following figure.
  • the scheduling information includes one or more of the following information: HARQ process number, NDI (new data indicator) information, and RV.
  • the network device sends the scheduling information through downlink control information according to the determined scheduling information.
  • the terminal device receives the downlink control information sent by the network device, and can determine or parse the scheduling information according to Table 5.
  • the terminal device receives or sends data according to the determined scheduling information.
  • b0 to b9 represent 10-bit or 10-bit numbers
  • N(i) represents the NDI information of the i-th TB
  • the number L of transmission blocks TB scheduled by the downlink control information may also be the number L of HARQ processes indicated by the downlink control information, that is, the number of TBs and the number of KARQ processes have a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the NDI information may indicate whether the data transmission scheduled by the downlink control information carries a newly transmitted TB or a retransmitted TB.
  • the NDI information may include the feedback information of each TB in the L TBs, and the feedback information of the TB may also be The response information is called TB.
  • the base station determines the number of TBs scheduled by the DCI, determines the HARQ process ID of each TB scheduled, the NDI of each TB, and one or more of the RV. If the base station determines to indicate the scheduling information in the first manner, the first bit is set to 1, and the first field is included at this time, and the first field includes 10 bits.
  • the first method is that the multiple HARQ processes that are scheduled are continuous, and/or the NDI information is indicated in a bitmap manner through the first field (or some bits of the first field).
  • the base station determines that the scheduling information is indicated in the second manner, and the first bit is 0 and the second bit is 1.
  • the downlink control information scheduling includes a second field and/or a third field, and the second field is used to indicate the HARQ process number and/or first identification information of the maximum N TBs, so
  • the third field is used to indicate the second identification information, the second identification or the first identification is used to indicate the newly transmitted or retransmitted information, or the second identification or the first identification is used to indicate the NDI information.
  • the second field includes 8 or 9 bits, and the HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs is determined in a bitmap manner according to the second field.
  • the downlink control information includes a fourth field and/or a fifth field, the fourth field is used to indicate HARQ process number and/or NDI information, and the fifth field is used to indicate a redundancy version (Redundancy Version, RV) .
  • the user equipment receives the downlink control information DCI sent by the base station.
  • the user equipment determines one or more of the scheduled HARQ process ID of each TB, the NDI of each TB, and the RV according to the DCI. If the first bit is 1, it is determined to determine the scheduling information in the first manner. If the base station determines to indicate the scheduling information in the first manner, the first bit is set to 1, and the first field is included at this time, and the first field includes 10 bits.
  • the first method is that the multiple HARQ processes that are scheduled are continuous, and/or the NDI information is indicated in a bitmap manner through the first field (or some bits of the first field).
  • the user equipment determines that the scheduling information is determined in the second manner according to the first bit being 0 and the second bit being 1.
  • the downlink control information scheduling includes a second field and/or a third field, and the second field is used to indicate the HARQ process number and/or first identification information of the maximum N TBs, so
  • the third field is used to indicate the second identification information, the second identification or the first identification is used to indicate the newly transmitted or retransmitted information, or the second identification or the first identification is used to indicate the NDI information.
  • the second field includes 8 or 9 bits, and the HARQ process number of each TB in the L TBs is determined in a bitmap manner according to the second field.
  • the user equipment determines that the number of TBs scheduled by the DCI is 1 or 2 according to the first bit being 0 and the second bit being 0.
  • the downlink control information includes a fourth field and/or a fifth field, the fourth field is used to indicate HARQ process number and/or NDI information, and the fifth field is used to indicate a redundancy version (Redundancy Version, RV) .
  • the second device receives the first information from the first device, for example, the first information is downlink control information (DCI).
  • the first information includes first indication information and/or second indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the number of scheduled TBs is the first set or the second set, and the first set and the second set The two sets are different (the number of at least one TB belongs to the second set but does not belong to the first set), or the first indication information and/or the second indication information are used to indicate the manner of scheduling multiple TBs.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the number of TBs included in the first set are 1 and 2, that is, the first information indicates that the number of TBs scheduled is 1 or 2.
  • the number of TBs included in the second set is ⁇ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ , or the number of TBs included in the second set is ⁇ 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 ⁇ .
  • the first indication information includes a first field
  • the first state (such as 1) of the first field is used for Indicates that the number of TBs scheduled belongs to the first set
  • the first state of the first field (such as 00) is used
  • the second state (such as 01) of the first field is used to indicate that the number of TBs scheduled belongs to the second set.
  • the first indication information includes one or more fields.
  • the x bit of the first indication information is used to indicate that the number of scheduled TBs belongs to the first set or that one or more TBs are scheduled according to the first scheduling mode.
  • the first method is that the scheduled one or more TBs are all new transmissions or all retransmissions.
  • the first method is that the HARQ processes associated with multiple scheduled TBs are continuous or discontinuous, that is, at this time, the HARQ process number is indicated through the bitmap through the second field.
  • the first information includes first indication information and second indication information
  • the first indication information includes one or more fields
  • the second indication information includes one or more fields.
  • the x bit of the first indication information is used to indicate that one or more TBs are scheduled according to the second scheduling mode, the number of scheduled TBs belongs to the first set or the scheduling of one or more TBs is performed according to the first scheduling mode or the second mode .
  • the first method is that the scheduled one or more TBs are all new transmissions or all retransmissions.
  • the first method is that the HARQ processes associated with multiple scheduled TBs are continuous or discontinuous, that is, at this time, the HARQ process number is indicated through the bitmap through the second field.
  • the second method is that the HARQ processes associated with multiple scheduled TBs are continuous.
  • the foregoing HARQ process is continuous, which can also be understood as determining the HARQ process number of one or more TBs to be scheduled according to the first HARQ process number and the number of scheduled TBs.
  • Another communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can effectively save signaling overhead.
  • This application provides another communication method.
  • the method can be applied to the terminal equipment in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and the method includes:
  • 7 bits in DCI indicate the HARQ process ID and NDI of one transport block TB scheduled by DCI, or indicate the HARQ process ID and NDI of each TB of 2 TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • the HARQ process ID of the TB has a value of 0 to 7, and the new data indication of the TB needs to be indicated in the DCI.
  • the HARQ process ID of one TB (can also be called the first TB) is 0-7
  • the HARQ process ID of the other TB (can also be called the second TB) is the value It is 0 to 7, but the HARQ process ID of the first TB is different from the HARQ process ID of the second TB.
  • the DCI needs to indicate the respective NDIs of the two TBs.
  • One of the 7 bits of the DCI is the NDI of the first TB.
  • the first TB is one of the N TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • 3 of the 7 bits of the DCI indicate HARQ process ID 1 in ⁇ 0-7 ⁇
  • the other 3 bits of the 7 bits of DCI indicate HARQ process ID 2 in ⁇ 0-7 ⁇ .
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 can be the same as the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 may also be different from the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the HARQ process number of one TB is HARQ process ID 1
  • the HARQ process number of the other TB is HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 and the value of HARQ process ID 2 are different, which means that the DCI schedules two TBs.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of the other TB except the first TB among the two TBs scheduled by the DCI is 1.
  • the first TB is the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • the HARQ process number of one TB is HARQ process ID 1
  • the HARQ process number of the other TB is HARQ process ID 2.
  • the first TB is one of the 2 TBs scheduled by the DCI
  • the second TB is the other TB among the 2 scheduled TBs except the first TB.
  • the HARQ process number of the first TB is HARQ process ID1
  • the HARQ process number of the second TB is HARQ process ID2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of the other TB except the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by the DCI is 1.
  • the first TB is the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • the first TB is one of the 2 TBs scheduled by the DCI
  • the second TB is the other TB among the 2 scheduled TBs except the first TB.
  • the HARQ process number of the first TB is HARQ process ID 1
  • the HARQ process number of the second TB is HARQ process ID 2.
  • the HARQ process number of the first TB is HARQ process ID1
  • the HARQ process number of the second TB is HARQ process ID2.
  • the base station uses 3 bits in the DCI to indicate HARQ process ID 1 in the range of ⁇ 0-7 ⁇ , and the base station uses 3 bits in DCI to indicate HARQ process ID 2 in the range of ⁇ 0 to 7 ⁇ , and HARQ process ID 1 is not Equal to HARQ process ID 2.
  • the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is 1, and the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is 1, and the value of HARQ process ID 1 is smaller than the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the user equipment receives the downlink control information DCI sent by the base station.
  • the 7 bits in the DCI indicate the number of TBs scheduled by the DCI, the HARQ process ID of each TB scheduled by the DCI is determined, and the NDI of each TB scheduled by the DCI is determined.
  • One of the 7 bits of DCI is the NDI of the first TB.
  • the first TB is one of the N TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • 3 of the 7 bits of the DCI indicate HARQ process ID 1 in ⁇ 0-7 ⁇
  • the other 3 bits of the 7 bits of DCI indicate HARQ process ID 2 in ⁇ 0-7 ⁇ .
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 can be the same as the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 may also be different from the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • Table 6 shows 7 bits in DCI.
  • NDI HARQ process ID
  • HARQ process number HARQ process number
  • HARQ process ID 1 HARQ process ID 2
  • Two TBs HARQ process ID 1 ⁇ HARQ process ID 2
  • NDI 0 for 2nd TB if HARQ process ID 1 ⁇ HARQ process ID 2
  • NDI 1for 2nd TB if HARQ process ID 1>HARQ process ID 2.
  • Another communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can effectively save signaling overhead.
  • This application also provides a communication method.
  • the method can be applied to the terminal equipment in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and the method includes:
  • the HARQ value range of each transmission block (TB) is 0 to N-1. There are 2 values for the new data indicator (NDI) of each TB.
  • N number of HARQ process ID values
  • 2 possibility of NDI value
  • log2(N) bits in DCI are used to indicate HARQ process ID1 (also can be referred to as HARQ process corresponding to the first TB), and the other log2(N) bits in DCI are used to indicate HARQ process ID2 (also It can be called another TB except the first TB, when two TBs are scheduled).
  • HARQ process ID1 is equal to HARQ process ID2, it means that one TB is scheduled; when HARQ process ID1 is not equal to HARQ process ID2, it means that 2 TBs are scheduled.
  • HARQ process ID1 is equal to HARQ process ID2, which means that their bit values or states are the same, and HARQ process ID1 is not equal to HARQ process ID2, which means that their bit values or states are different.
  • 1 bit in the DCI is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to HARQ process ID1.
  • the other bit in the DCI is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to HARQ process ID2.
  • N 8 bits are used to indicate HARQ process ID1
  • the other 3 bits are used to indicate HARQ process ID2
  • 1 bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to HARQ process ID1
  • the other 1 bit is used to indicate HARQ process ID2 The corresponding NDI.
  • 1 bit in the DCI is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to HARQ process ID1.
  • HARQ process ID1 is not equal to HARQ process ID2, that is, when 2 TBs are scheduled, when the value of HARQ process ID1 is greater than HARQ process ID2, it means that the NDI value corresponding to HARQ process ID2 is the same as the NDI corresponding to HARQ process ID1;
  • the value of HARQ process ID1 is less than HARQ process ID2, it means that the NDI value corresponding to HARQ process ID2 is different from the NDI value corresponding to HARQ process ID1.
  • 1 bit in the DCI is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to HARQ process ID1.
  • HARQ process ID1 is not equal to HARQ process ID2, that is, when 2 TBs are scheduled, when the value of HARQ process ID1 is greater than HARQ process ID2, it means that the NDI value corresponding to HARQ process ID2 is different from the NDI corresponding to HARQ process ID1 ;
  • the value of HARQ process ID1 is less than HARQ process ID2, it means that the NDI value corresponding to HARQ process ID2 is the same as the NDI corresponding to HARQ process ID1.
  • the HARQ process number of the first TB is HARQ process ID1
  • the HARQ process number of the second TB is HARQ process ID2.
  • the log2(N) bits in the DCI used by the base station indicate HARQ process ID 1 in the range of ⁇ 0 ⁇ N-1 ⁇ , and the log2(N) bits in the DCI used by the base station indicate HARQ in the range ⁇ 0 ⁇ N-1 ⁇ process ID 2, and HARQ process ID 1 is not equal to HARQ process ID 2.
  • the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is the same as the NDI of the first TB, then the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2; the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is different from the NDI of the first TB, then the HARQ process ID The value of 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is the same as the NDI of the first TB, the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2; the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is different from the NDI of the first TB, then HARQ The value of process ID 1 is smaller than the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the user equipment receives the downlink control information DCI sent by the base station.
  • the M1 bits in the DCI indicate the number of TBs scheduled by the DCI, the HARQ process ID of each TB scheduled by the DCI is determined, and the NDI of each TB scheduled by the DCI is determined.
  • One of the M1 bits of the DCI is the NDI of the first TB.
  • the first TB is one of the Q TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • log2(N) bits indicate HARQ process ID 1 in ⁇ 0 ⁇ N-1 ⁇
  • the other log2(N) bits in the M1 bits of the DCI are in ⁇ 0 ⁇ N-1 ⁇ .
  • N-1 ⁇ indicates HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 can be the same as the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 may also be different from the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • one of the M2 bits of the DCI indicates the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1), and the terminal device determines that the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1) corresponds to this bit NDI. If the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, the user equipment determines the NDI corresponding to the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID2) for DCI scheduling according to another bit of the M2 bits of the DCI.
  • one of the M1 bits of the DCI indicates the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1), and the terminal device determines the corresponding NDI to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1) according to this bit NDI. If the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, the user equipment determines that the NDI corresponding to the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID2) scheduled by the DCI is the same as the NDI corresponding to the first TB.
  • the user equipment determines that the NDI of the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID 2) scheduled by DCI is different from the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1).
  • the user equipment determines that the NDI corresponding to the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID2) scheduled by the DCI is different from the NDI corresponding to the first TB. If the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2, the user equipment determines that the NDI of the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID 2) scheduled by DCI is the same as the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1).
  • the HARQ process ID of the TB has a value of 0 to 7, and the new data indication of the TB needs to be indicated in the DCI.
  • the HARQ process ID of one TB (can also be called the first TB) is 0-7
  • the HARQ process ID of the other TB (can also be called the second TB) is the value It is one of 0-7 except the HARQ process of the previous TB.
  • the HARQ process ID of the first TB is different from the HARQ process ID of the second TB.
  • the DCI needs to indicate the respective NDIs of the two TBs.
  • One of the 7 bits of the DCI is the NDI of the first TB.
  • the first TB is one of the Q TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • 3 of the 7 bits of the DCI indicate HARQ process ID 1 in ⁇ 0-7 ⁇
  • the other 3 bits of the 7 bits of DCI indicate HARQ process ID 2 in ⁇ 0-7 ⁇ .
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 can be the same as the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 may also be different from the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the HARQ process number of one TB is HARQ process ID 1
  • the HARQ process number of the other TB is HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 and the value of HARQ process ID 2 are different, which means that the DCI schedules two TBs.
  • One of the bits in the DCI is used to indicate HARQ process ID1 or the NDI corresponding to the first TB.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of the other TB except the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI is the same as the NDI of the first TB, or the NDI and HARQ of HARQ process ID2 Process ID1 has the same NDI.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of another TB other than the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI is different from the NDI of the first TB, or the NDI of HARQ process ID 2 is different from the NDI of the first TB.
  • the NDI of HARQ process ID1 is different.
  • the first TB is the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • one bit in the DCI is used to indicate HARQ process ID1 or the NDI corresponding to the first TB.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of the other TB except the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI is different from the NDI of the first TB, or the NDI of HARQ process ID 2 is different from the NDI of the first TB.
  • the NDI of HARQ process ID1 is different.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of the other TB except the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI is the same as the NDI of the first TB, or the NDI and HARQ of HARQ process ID2 Process ID1 has the same NDI.
  • the first TB is the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • the HARQ process number of the first TB is HARQ process ID1
  • the HARQ process number of the second TB is HARQ process ID2.
  • the base station uses 3 bits in the DCI to indicate HARQ process ID 1 in the range of ⁇ 0-7 ⁇ , and the base station uses 3 bits in DCI to indicate HARQ process ID 2 in the range of ⁇ 0 to 7 ⁇ , and HARQ process ID 1 is not Equal to HARQ process ID 2.
  • the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is the same as the NDI of the first TB, then the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2; the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is different from the NDI of the first TB, then the HARQ process ID The value of 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is the same as the NDI of the first TB, the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2; the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is different from the NDI of the first TB, then HARQ The value of process ID 1 is smaller than the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the user equipment receives the downlink control information DCI sent by the base station.
  • the 7 bits in the DCI indicate the number of TBs scheduled by the DCI, the HARQ process ID of each TB scheduled by the DCI is determined, and the NDI of each TB scheduled by the DCI is determined.
  • One of the 7 bits of DCI is the NDI of the first TB.
  • the first TB is one of the Q TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • 3 of the 7 bits of the DCI indicate HARQ process ID 1 in ⁇ 0-7 ⁇
  • the other 3 bits of the 7 bits of DCI indicate HARQ process ID 2 in ⁇ 0-7 ⁇ .
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 can be the same as the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 may also be different from the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • one of the 7 bits of the DCI indicates the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1), and the terminal device determines according to the bit that the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1) corresponds to NDI. If the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, the user equipment determines that the NDI corresponding to the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID2) scheduled by the DCI is the same as the NDI corresponding to the first TB.
  • the user equipment determines that the NDI of the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID 2) scheduled by DCI is different from the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1).
  • the user equipment determines that the NDI corresponding to the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID2) scheduled by the DCI is different from the NDI corresponding to the first TB. If the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2, the user equipment determines that the NDI of the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID 2) scheduled by DCI is the same as the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1).
  • the HARQ process ID of the TB has a value of 0 to 3, and the new data indication of the TB needs to be indicated in the DCI.
  • the HARQ process ID of one TB also called the first TB
  • the HARQ process ID of the other TB also called the second TB
  • the HARQ process ID of the first TB is different from the HARQ process ID of the second TB.
  • the DCI needs to indicate the respective NDIs of the two TBs.
  • One of the 5 bits of the DCI is the NDI of the first TB.
  • the first TB is one of the Q TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • 2 of the 5 bits of the DCI indicate HARQ process ID 1 in ⁇ 0 ⁇ 3 ⁇
  • the other 2 bits of the 5 bits of DCI indicate HARQ process ID 2 in ⁇ 0 ⁇ 3 ⁇ .
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 can be the same as the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 may also be different from the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the HARQ process number of one TB is HARQ process ID 1
  • the HARQ process number of the other TB is HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 and the value of HARQ process ID 2 are different, which means that the DCI schedules two TBs.
  • One of the bits in the DCI is used to indicate HARQ process ID1 or the NDI corresponding to the first TB.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of the other TB except the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI is the same as the NDI of the first TB, or the NDI and HARQ of HARQ process ID2 Process ID1 has the same NDI.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of another TB other than the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI is different from the NDI of the first TB, or the NDI of HARQ process ID 2 is different from the NDI of the first TB.
  • the NDI of HARQ process ID1 is different.
  • the first TB is the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • one bit in the DCI is used to indicate HARQ process ID1 or the NDI corresponding to the first TB.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of the other TB except the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI is different from the NDI of the first TB, or the NDI of HARQ process ID 2 is different from the NDI of the first TB.
  • the NDI of HARQ process ID1 is different.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2, which means that the NDI of the other TB except the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI is the same as the NDI of the first TB, or the NDI and HARQ of HARQ process ID2 Process ID1 has the same NDI.
  • the first TB is the first TB among the 2 TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • the HARQ process number of the first TB is HARQ process ID1
  • the HARQ process number of the second TB is HARQ process ID2.
  • the base station uses 2 bits of DCI to indicate HARQ process ID 1 in the range of ⁇ 0 to 3 ⁇ , and base station uses 2 bits of DCI to indicate HARQ process ID 2 in the range of ⁇ 0 to 3 ⁇ , and HARQ process ID 1 does not Equal to HARQ process ID 2.
  • the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is the same as the NDI of the first TB, then the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2; the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is different from the NDI of the first TB, then the HARQ process ID The value of 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is the same as the NDI of the first TB, the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2; the base station determines that the NDI of the second TB is different from the NDI of the first TB, then HARQ The value of process ID 1 is smaller than the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the user equipment receives the downlink control information DCI sent by the base station.
  • the 5 bits in the DCI indicate the number of TBs scheduled by the DCI, the HARQ process ID of each TB scheduled by the DCI is determined, and the NDI of each TB scheduled by the DCI is determined.
  • One of the 5 bits of DCI is the NDI of the first TB.
  • the first TB is one of the Q TBs scheduled by DCI.
  • 2 of the 5 bits of the DCI indicate HARQ process ID 1 in ⁇ 0 ⁇ 3 ⁇
  • the other 2 bits of the 5 bits of DCI indicate HARQ process ID 2 in ⁇ 0 ⁇ 3 ⁇ .
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 can be the same as the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • the value of HARQ process ID 1 may also be different from the value of HARQ process ID 2.
  • one of the 5 bits of the DCI indicates the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1), and the terminal device determines that the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1) corresponds to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1) according to this bit NDI. If the value of HARQ process ID 1 is less than the value of HARQ process ID 2, the user equipment determines that the NDI corresponding to the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID2) scheduled by the DCI is the same as the NDI corresponding to the first TB.
  • the user equipment determines that the NDI of the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID 2) scheduled by DCI is different from the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1).
  • the user equipment determines that the NDI corresponding to the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID2) scheduled by the DCI is different from the NDI corresponding to the first TB. If the value of HARQ process ID 1 is greater than the value of HARQ process ID 2, the user equipment determines that the NDI of the second TB (that is, HARQ process ID 2) scheduled by DCI is the same as the NDI corresponding to the first TB (or HARQ process ID 1).
  • Another communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application can effectively save signaling overhead.
  • Enhanced Machine Type Communication (eMTC) system and other evolutionary systems are systems derived from LTE. It has been implemented in Release 14 and previous versions of the standard (working in Inband mode), and has actually begun to be deployed. The battery life of MTC UE is usually expected to be 10 years or longer.
  • NR new radio
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the MTC system works on the NR frequency band and how to avoid the interference between the MTC system and the NR system is a need to consider Important question.
  • the LTE system includes the central DC sub-carrier and is not calculated in the resource block (Resource block, RB), and NR does not include the central DC sub-carrier, at the same time due to the LTE channel grid and NR channel grid may It is not aligned.
  • the RBs of LTE and NR are not aligned.
  • the prior art punctures subcarriers that are not aligned with NR in LTE.
  • the problem that has not been solved in the prior art is the edge of which frequency resources should be punched.
  • this application provides a communication method.
  • the method can be applied to the terminal equipment in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and the method includes:
  • the network device sends first information, the first information is used to indicate the position of puncturing the first resource and the number of subcarriers, the first resource includes N RBs or M narrowbands, where N is greater than or equal to 1.
  • N is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the M or N narrowbands are configured by the network device, that is, the network device sends second information.
  • the second information is used to indicate M or N.
  • the terminal device receives the second information.
  • the terminal device determines M or N according to the second information. Determine N according to the second information.
  • the terminal device receives third information sent by the network device, where the third information is used to indicate whether the first resource is N RBs or M narrowbands.
  • the terminal device determines according to the third information that the first resource includes N RBs or M narrowbands. That is, the third information at this time indicates the granularity of the first resource, and the granularity may be narrowband or RB.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the first information, whether one narrowband when the system bandwidth is 3 MHz is a narrowband numbered 0 or a narrowband numbered 1.
  • the network device sends fourth information, and the terminal device receives fourth information, which is used to indicate M narrowband positions; when the system bandwidth is 3MHz, the fourth information is used to indicate that one narrowband is numbered 0 The narrowband is still the narrowband numbered 1.
  • the user equipment determines whether one narrowband is the narrowband numbered 0 or the narrowband numbered 1 when the system bandwidth is 3MHz according to the fourth information.
  • the terminal device determines whether the two narrowbands when the system bandwidth is 5 MHz are the narrowbands numbered 0 and 1 or the narrowbands numbered 2 and 3 according to the first information.
  • the network device sends fourth information, and the terminal device receives fourth information.
  • the fourth information is used to indicate M narrowband positions; the fourth information is used to indicate that when the system bandwidth is 5MHz, the two narrowbands are numbered 0. And the narrowband numbered 1 is still the narrowband numbered 2 and numbered 3.
  • the user equipment determines whether the two narrowbands numbered 0 and numbered 1 are the two narrowbands numbered 0 and numbered according to the fourth information. 2 narrowbands numbered 2 and numbered 3.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the first information, that the eight narrowbands when the system bandwidth is 10 MHz are narrowbands numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
  • the network device sends fourth information, and the terminal device receives fourth information.
  • the fourth information is used to indicate M narrowband positions; the fourth information is used to indicate that the 8 narrowbands are numbered 0 when the system bandwidth is 10MHz. , 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 narrowbands, at this time the user equipment determines according to the fourth information that the 8 narrowbands when the system bandwidth is 10MHz are numbered 0,1,2,3,4,5 , 6, 7 narrow band.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the first information, whether the six narrowbands when the system bandwidth is 15 MHz are the narrowbands numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or the narrowbands numbered 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, The narrow band of 11.
  • the network device sends fourth information, and the terminal device receives fourth information, which is used to indicate M narrowband positions; the fourth information is used to indicate that when the system bandwidth is 15MHz, the 6 narrowbands are numbered 0 , 1,2,3,4,5 narrowbands are still numbered 6,7,8,9,10,11.
  • the user equipment determines, according to the fourth information, whether the six narrowbands when the system bandwidth is 15MHz are the narrowbands numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or the narrowbands numbered 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11. Narrow band.
  • the terminal device determines, according to the first information, that the 16 narrowbands when the system bandwidth is 20 MHz are numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12. Narrow bands of 13, 14, 15.
  • the network device sends fourth information, and the terminal device receives fourth information.
  • the fourth information is used to indicate M narrowband positions; the fourth information is used to indicate that 16 narrowbands are numbered 0 when the system bandwidth is 20MHz. ,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15 narrow band.
  • the user equipment determines according to the fourth information that the 16 narrowbands when the system bandwidth is 20 MHz are numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, The narrow band of 14,15.
  • one DCI is allowed to schedule multiple transmission blocks (transmission blocks).
  • transmission blocks For users in coverage enhancement mode B, the maximum number of TB blocks scheduled is 4.
  • 10 bits are used to indicate NDI, HARQ process number, scheduled TB number, and MCS.
  • this application provides a communication method.
  • the method can be applied to the terminal equipment in the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and the method includes:
  • An information processing method characterized in that it comprises:
  • the terminal device receives downlink control information from the network device, where the downlink control information can schedule at most N transport blocks TB, where N is a positive integer; the downlink control information includes a first bit and a second bit;
  • the first bit includes M bits, the second bit includes P bits, and the M and P are integers greater than or equal to 1;
  • the terminal device determines the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the second bit, and the terminal device determines the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process number corresponding to the L TBs according to the first bit And the new data of the L TBs indicate at least one of the NDI information; the terminal device determines the modulation and demodulation strategy MCS according to the second bit and/or the first bit;
  • the terminal device transmits information according to the scheduled number L of TBs, the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the L TBs, and the NDI and MCS corresponding to the L TBs.
  • the terminal device determining the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the second bit comprises:
  • the terminal device determines the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to a value obtained by performing a remainder operation on the first value V corresponding to the second bit with respect to 3.
  • L 1 or 2 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number, and the other 2 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the second HARQ process number, and the first bit The other 1 bit in is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB;
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number with the larger number, the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 0, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the HARQ process number with the smaller number among the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number;
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number with the larger number, the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 1, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the HARQ process number with the smaller number among the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number.
  • L 1 or 2 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number, and the other 2 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the second HARQ process number, and the first bit The other 1 bit in is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB;
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number with the larger number, the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 1, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the HARQ process number with the smaller number among the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number;
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number with the larger number, the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 0, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the HARQ process number with the smaller number among the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number.
  • the third HARQ process number is the HARQ process number that is not scheduled; and/or,
  • the terminal device determines the MCS index according to the first value V corresponding to the second bit relative to the value obtained after the rounding operation of 3; or,
  • the terminal device determines the MCS index according to the value obtained after the first value V corresponding to the second bit is rounded down with respect to 3.
  • the terminal device determines a first offset value according to one of the first bits, the first offset value is an integer greater than or equal to 0, and the terminal device corresponds to the first offset value and the second bit
  • the first value V determines the index of the MCS.
  • An information processing method characterized by comprising:
  • the network device sends the downlink control information to the terminal device, where the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs, the downlink control information includes a first bit and a second bit; the first bit includes M bits, The second bit includes P bits, and the M and P are integers greater than or equal to 1;
  • the second bit is used to indicate the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information, the N and the L are positive integers, and 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N; the first bit is used to indicate the L TBs
  • the corresponding hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process number and the new data of the L TBs indicate at least one of the NDI information; the second bit and/or the first bit are used to indicate a modulation and demodulation strategy (Modulation and Demodulation Strategy). Coding Scheme, MCS);
  • the network device transmits information according to the scheduled number L of TBs, the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the L TBs, and the NDI and MCS corresponding to the L TBs.
  • the first bit includes one or more fields
  • the second bit includes one or more fields
  • the number of TBs of information scheduling is L.
  • the first value V corresponding to the second bit is 2 after performing the remainder operation with respect to 3.
  • the first HARQ process number is equal to the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the HARQ process number with the larger number of the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number.
  • the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 0, the first HARQ process number is greater than the second HARQ process number, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the smaller of the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number HARQ process number;
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the HARQ process number with the larger number of the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number.
  • the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 1, the first HARQ process number is smaller than the second HARQ process number, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the smaller of the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number HARQ process number.
  • L 1 or 2 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number, and the other 2 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the second HARQ process number, and the first bit The other 1 bit in is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB;
  • the first HARQ process number is equal to the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the HARQ process number with the larger number of the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number.
  • the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 1, the first HARQ process number is greater than the second HARQ process number, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the smaller of the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number HARQ process number;
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the HARQ process number with the larger number of the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number.
  • the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 0, the first HARQ process number is smaller than the second HARQ process number, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the smaller of the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number HARQ process number.
  • the third HARQ process number is the HARQ process number that is not scheduled; and/or,
  • the second bit and/or the first bit is a value obtained by rounding down the first value V corresponding to the second bit with respect to 3.
  • the network device sends the downlink control information to the terminal device.
  • the downlink control information can schedule a maximum of N TBs
  • the downlink control information includes a first bit and a second bit
  • the first bit includes M bits
  • the second bit includes P bits.
  • M and P are integers greater than or equal to 1
  • the second bit is used to indicate the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information, the N and the L are positive integers, and 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N
  • the The first bit is used to indicate the HARQ process number of the hybrid automatic repeat request corresponding to the L TBs and the new data of the L TBs indicate NDI information
  • the second bit and/or the first bit are used for Indicate Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS);
  • the network device can determine the number of transmission blocks TB scheduled by the downlink control information; it can also determine the HARQ process number of the L TB; it can also determine the new data of the L TB Indicates NDI information; MCS can also be determined.
  • the downlink control information includes a first bit and a second bit, where the first bit includes one or more fields, and the second bit includes one or more fields. For example, the first bit includes 5 bits, and the second bit includes 5 bits.
  • the terminal device determines the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information (also called the number of HARQ processes) according to the second bit, and the terminal device determines the number of TBs according to the first bit.
  • the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process numbers corresponding to L TBs (also called L HARQ processes) and the new data of the L TBs (also called L HARQ processes) indicate NDI information; the terminal The device determines a modulation and demodulation strategy (Modulation and Coding Scheme, MCS) or MCS index according to the second bit.
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • the network equipment and the terminal equipment transmit information according to the scheduled number L of TBs, the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the L TBs, and the NDI and MCS corresponding to the L TBs.
  • terminal device transmission information can be understood as receiving information, and the transmission information on the network device side can be understood as sending information; or the terminal device transmission information can be understood as sending information, and the network device transmission information can be understood as receiving information.
  • the information transmitted by the network equipment and the terminal equipment may be PDSCH or PUSCH.
  • the second bit may indicate the number L of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information through a value obtained by performing a remainder operation on the first value V corresponding to the second bit with respect to 3. Therefore, the terminal device can determine the number of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information according to the value obtained by performing a remainder operation on the first value V corresponding to the second bit with respect to 3. That is to say, the first value V corresponding to the index indicated by all the bits of the second bit or the first value V corresponding to the state of all the bits of the second bit is relative to the number obtained by modulo 3 to determine the scheduling
  • the number of TBs, namely v mode 3 represents the remainder after v/3 to determine the number of scheduled TBs (or the number of HARQ processes).
  • L 1 or 2 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number, and the other 2 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the second HARQ process number, The other 1 bit in the first bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB. Since 1 or 2 TBs are scheduled at this time, there is at least one TB at this time.
  • the first HARQ process number is equal to the second HARQ process number
  • L 1
  • the first HARQ process number is greater than the second process number
  • L 2
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number with the larger number, the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 1, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the HARQ process number with the smaller number among the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the first HARQ process number is less than the second process number
  • L 2
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number with the larger number, the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 0, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB
  • the first HARQ process number is equal to the second HARQ process number
  • L 1
  • the first HARQ process number is greater than the second process number
  • L 2
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number with the larger number, the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 0, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB is the HARQ process number with the smaller number among the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the first HARQ process number is less than the second process number
  • L 2
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to the second TB other than the first TB in the 2 TBs is the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number
  • the HARQ process number with the larger number, the NDI corresponding to the second TB is 1, and the HARQ process number corresponding to the first TB
  • the corresponding HARQ process is scheduled. This allows more flexible instructions, reduces the coding and decoding complexity of users and base stations, and reduces power consumption.
  • L 4 bits in the first bit are used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the L TBs.
  • Table 8 is only an exemplary description, and does not specifically limit the correspondence between the status of the 2 bits in the first bit and the number of the 3 HARQ processes that are scheduled.
  • the second bit and/or the first bit may indicate the index of the MCS by the value obtained after the first value V corresponding to the second bit is rounded down with respect to 3. Therefore, the terminal device determines the MCS index according to the first value V corresponding to the second bit with respect to the value obtained by the rounding down operation of 3. That is, at this time, V is rounded down relative to 3, that is, floor(V/3), where floor(x) represents an integer not greater than x, and the number obtained after rounding is used to determine the index of the MCS.
  • one bit of the first bit is used to indicate that the index of the MCS is 10 or the MCS is determined based on the value obtained after the first value V corresponding to the second bit is rounded down to 3 index of.
  • one bit in the first bit except the 4 NDI indicator bits is used to indicate that the index of the MCS is 10 or the first value V corresponding to the second bit is rounded down to 3
  • the value determines the index of the MCS. For example, when the bit is 0, it means that the MCS index is determined according to the value obtained after the first value V corresponding to the second bit is rounded down with respect to 3; when the bit is 1, it means that the MCS index is 10.
  • one bit of the first bit is used to indicate the first offset value, and the first offset value is an integer greater than or equal to, for example, 0 or 1.
  • the index of the MCS is determined according to the first value Z corresponding to the first offset value and the second bit.
  • the index of the MCS is determined according to the sum of the first value V and the first offset value Z corresponding to the second bit relative to the value obtained after the rounding down operation of 3.
  • the obtained value determines the index of the MCS, that is, the index of the MCS is determined according to the floor (Z+V).
  • Bits B0 to B4 represent the first bit
  • V is the number indicated by 5 bits in the second bit
  • the value range is 0-31.
  • the M0 bit in the first field is used to indicate that the index of the MCS is 10 or to determine the index of the MCS according to the value obtained by rounding down the first value V corresponding to the second bit with respect to 3.
  • H0 represents the first HARQ process number
  • H2 represents the second HARQ process number
  • N0 represents the NDI corresponding to the first TB
  • N1, N2, and N3 represent the scheduled second TB, third TB, and NDI corresponding to the fourth TB.
  • Hx represents the number of the HARQ process that is not scheduled, or the number of the three HARQ processes that are scheduled.
  • Imcs represents the index of MCS.
  • Bits B0 to B4 represent the first bit, and V is the number indicated by 5 bits in the second bit, and the value range is 0-31.
  • H0 represents the first HARQ process number
  • H2 represents the second HARQ process number
  • N0 represents the NDI corresponding to the first TB
  • N1, N2, and N3 represent the scheduled second TB, third TB, and NDI corresponding to the fourth TB.
  • Hx represents the number of the HARQ process that is not scheduled, or the number of the three HARQ processes that are scheduled.
  • Imcs represents the index of MCS.
  • the value corresponding to the bit may refer to the value indicated by the bit, or may be the value converted from the binary value of the bit to the decimal system, which is not specifically limited here.
  • This application also provides another communication method to solve the following problem:
  • one DCI is allowed to schedule multiple transmission blocks.
  • the maximum number of TB blocks scheduled is 4.
  • 10 bits are used to indicate NDI, HARQ process number, scheduled TB number, and MCS.
  • This method can be applied to the terminal equipment in the communication system shown in Fig. 1. The following describes from the side of the first node, the method includes:
  • the first node sends downlink control information to the second node.
  • the first node indicates the number of TBs scheduled by the downlink control information, the HARQ process number corresponding to each TB, the NDI and MCS index of each TB. Among them, there are 11 or 10 MCS indexes.
  • the downlink control information includes a third bit and a fourth bit.
  • the third bit includes 5 bits
  • the fourth bit includes 5 bits. The value indicated by the third bit is used to indicate the MCS index and the number of TBs to be scheduled.
  • the value V indicated by the third bit is a multiple of 3.
  • One bit in the fourth bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB, and the other two bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number (H0).
  • Two more bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the second HARQ process number (H1).
  • H0 is indicated in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • the value V 3m indicated by the third bit, where m is 0 or a positive integer.
  • One bit in the fourth bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB, two bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number (H0), and two more bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate The second HARQ process number (H1).
  • H0 is indicated in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • One bit in the fourth bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB, two bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number (H0), and two more bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate The second HARQ process number (H1).
  • H0 is indicated in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • One bit in the fourth bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB, two bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number (H0), and two more bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate The second HARQ process number (H1).
  • H0 is indicated in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • 3 bits are used to indicate the NDI of 3 TBs respectively.
  • H2 is indicated in ⁇ 012, 013, 023, 123 ⁇ .
  • two more bits in the fourth bit indicate the unscheduled HARQ process number H2 (H2 takes a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3).
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the three TBs are the remaining three process numbers in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ except for H2.
  • 3 bits are used to indicate the NDI of 3 TBs respectively.
  • H2 is indicated in ⁇ 012, 013, 023, 123 ⁇ .
  • two more bits in the fourth bit indicate the unscheduled HARQ process number H2 (H2 takes a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3).
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the three TBs are the remaining three process numbers in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ except for H2.
  • 3 bits are used to indicate the NDI of 3 TBs respectively.
  • H2 is indicated in ⁇ 012, 013, 023, 123 ⁇ .
  • two more bits in the fourth bit indicate the unscheduled HARQ process number H2 (H2 takes a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3).
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the three TBs are the remaining three process numbers in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ except for H2.
  • DCI schedules 4 TBs
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to 4 TBs are 0, 1, 2, 3.
  • the 4 bits of the fourth bit respectively indicate the NDI corresponding to each of the 4 TBs.
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to 4 TBs are 0, 1, 2, 3.
  • the 4 bits of the fourth bit respectively indicate the NDI corresponding to each of the 4 TBs.
  • DCI schedules 4 TBs, the value indicated by the third bit is V 3m+2, where m is 0 or a positive integer.
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to 4 TBs are 0, 1, 2, 3.
  • the 4 bits of the fourth bit respectively indicate the NDI corresponding to each of the 4 TBs.
  • one bit of the fourth bit is used to indicate that the index of the MCS is 10 or to indicate that the first value V corresponding to the third bit is rounded down with respect to the value obtained by the operation of 3
  • the index of MCS For example, one bit in the fourth bit except the 4 NDI indicator bits is used to indicate that the index of the MCS is 10 or the first value V corresponding to the third bit is rounded down to 3
  • the value determines the index of the MCS. For example, when the bit is 0, it means that the MCS index is determined according to the value obtained after the first value V corresponding to the third bit is rounded down with respect to 3. When the bit is 1, it means that the MCS index is 10.
  • one bit of the fourth bit is used to indicate the first offset value, and the first offset value is an integer greater than or equal to, for example, 0 or 1.
  • the MCS index is determined according to the first offset value and the first value Z corresponding to the third bit.
  • the index of the MCS is determined according to the sum of the first value V and the first offset value Z corresponding to the third bit relative to the value obtained by the rounding down operation of 3.
  • the obtained value determines the index of the MCS, that is, the index of the MCS is determined according to the floor (Z+V).
  • Ni is TBi or the NDI of the i+1th TB.
  • the value of i is 0, 1, 2, 3.
  • V in the following table is the value indicated by the third bit.
  • floor is the round-down operation.
  • the fourth bit contains 4 bits b0, b1, b2, and b3.
  • bits B0 to B4 represent the fourth bit
  • V is the number indicated by 5 bits in the third bit
  • the value range is 0-31.
  • H0 represents the first HARQ process number
  • H2 represents the second HARQ process number
  • N0 represents the NDI corresponding to the first TB
  • N1, N2, and N3 represent the scheduled second TB, third TB, and NDI corresponding to the fourth TB.
  • Hx represents the number of the HARQ process that is not scheduled, or the number of the three HARQ processes that are scheduled.
  • Imcs represents the index of MCS.
  • Bits B0 to B4 represent the fourth bit
  • V is the number indicated by 5 bits in the third bit
  • the value range is 0-31.
  • the M0 bit in the first field is used to indicate that the index of the MCS is 10 or to determine the index of the MCS according to the value obtained after the first value V corresponding to the fourth bit is rounded down with respect to 3.
  • H0 represents the first HARQ process number
  • H2 represents the second HARQ process number
  • N0 represents the NDI corresponding to the first TB
  • N1, N2, and N3 represent the scheduled second TB, third TB, and NDI corresponding to the fourth TB.
  • Hx represents the number of the HARQ process that is not scheduled, or the number of the three HARQ processes that are scheduled.
  • Imcs represents the index of MCS.
  • the method includes:
  • the second node receives the downlink control information sent by the first node.
  • the second node determines the number of TBs to be scheduled through the received downlink control information, the HARQ process number corresponding to each TB, the NDI and the MCS index of each TB. Among them, there are 11 or 10 MCS indexes.
  • the downlink control information includes a third bit and a fourth bit.
  • the third bit includes 5 bits
  • the fourth bit includes 5 bits.
  • the second node also determines the number of scheduled TBs according to the value indicated by the third bit.
  • One bit in the fourth bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB, and the other two bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number (H0).
  • Two more bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the second HARQ process number (H1).
  • H0 is indicated in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • the value V 3m+1 indicated by the third bit, where m is 0 or a positive integer, then DCI schedules 1 TB or DCI schedules 2 TBs.
  • One bit in the fourth bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB, and the other two bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number (H0).
  • Two more bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the second HARQ process number (H1).
  • H0 is indicated in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • the HARQ process number of this TB is H0.
  • One bit in the fourth bit is used to indicate the NDI corresponding to the first TB, and the other two bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the first HARQ process number (H0).
  • Two more bits in the fourth bit are used to indicate the second HARQ process number (H1).
  • H0 is indicated in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ .
  • 3 bits are used to indicate the NDI of 3 TBs respectively.
  • H2 is indicated in ⁇ 012, 013, 023, 123 ⁇ .
  • 2 bits in the fourth bit indicate the NDI of 2 TBs except the first TB among 3 TBs.
  • H2 takes the value 0, 1, 2, or 3).
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the three TBs are the remaining three process numbers in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ except for H2.
  • 3 bits are used to indicate the NDI of 3 TBs respectively.
  • H2 is indicated in ⁇ 012, 013, 023, 123 ⁇ .
  • 2 bits in the fourth bit indicate the NDI of 2 TBs except the first TB among 3 TBs.
  • H2 takes the value 0, 1, 2, or 3).
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the three TBs are the remaining three process numbers in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ except for H2.
  • 3 bits are used to indicate the NDI of 3 TBs respectively.
  • H2 is indicated in ⁇ 012, 013, 023, 123 ⁇ .
  • 2 bits in the fourth bit indicate the NDI of 2 TBs except the first TB among 3 TBs.
  • H2 takes the value 0, 1, 2, or 3).
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the three TBs are the remaining three process numbers in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ except for H2.
  • the DCI schedules 4 TBs.
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to 4 TBs are 0, 1, 2, 3.
  • the 4 bits of the fourth bit respectively indicate the NDI corresponding to each of the 4 TBs.
  • the DCI schedules 4 TBs.
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to 4 TBs are 0, 1, 2, 3.
  • the 4 bits of the fourth bit respectively indicate the NDI corresponding to each of the 4 TBs.
  • the DCI schedules 4 TBs.
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to 4 TBs are 0, 1, 2, 3.
  • the 4 bits of the fourth bit respectively indicate the NDI corresponding to each of the 4 TBs.
  • one bit of the fourth bit is used to indicate that the index of the MCS is 10 or to indicate that the first value V corresponding to the third bit is rounded down with respect to the value obtained by the operation of 3
  • the index of MCS For example, one bit in the fourth bit except the 4 NDI indicator bits is used to indicate that the index of the MCS is 10 or the first value V corresponding to the third bit is rounded down to 3
  • the value determines the index of the MCS. For example, when the bit is 0, it means that the MCS index is determined according to the value obtained after the first value V corresponding to the third bit is rounded down with respect to 3. When the bit is 1, it means that the MCS index is 10.
  • one bit of the fourth bit is used to indicate the first offset value, and the first offset value is an integer greater than or equal to, for example, 0 or 1.
  • the MCS index is determined according to the first offset value and the first value Z corresponding to the third bit.
  • the index of the MCS is determined according to the sum of the first value V and the first offset value Z corresponding to the third bit relative to the value obtained by the rounding down operation of 3.
  • the obtained value determines the index of the MCS, that is, the index of the MCS is determined according to the floor (Z+V).
  • the index indicated by the third bit performs the remainder operation on 3 and the value obtained is 0, and the second node determines that the DCI schedules 1 TB or 2 T.
  • the second node determines the NDI corresponding to the first TB according to one bit in the fourth bit, the second node determines the first HARQ process number (H0) according to the other two bits in the fourth bit, and the second node determines the NDI according to the fourth bit
  • the other two bits in determine the second HARQ process number (H1).
  • H0 H1
  • the second node determines that DCI schedules 1 TB, and the HARQ process number of this TB is H0.
  • the index indicated by the third bit performs the remainder operation on 3 and the value obtained is 1, and the second node determines that the DCI schedules 3 TBs.
  • the second node determines the NDI of 3 TBs according to 3 bits in the fourth bit.
  • the second node determines the HARQ process number H2 corresponding to the 3 TBs according to the other two bits in the fourth bit. For example, H2 is indicated in ⁇ 012, 013, 023, 123 ⁇ . Or, the second node determines the NDI of the other 2 TBs in the 3 TBs except the first TB according to the 2 bits in the fourth bit.
  • the second node determines the unscheduled HARQ process number H2 (H2 takes a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3) according to the other two bits in the fourth bit.
  • H2 takes a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3
  • the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the three TBs are the remaining three process numbers in ⁇ 0, 1, 2, 3 ⁇ except for H2.
  • the index indicated by the third bit performs the remainder operation on 3 and the value obtained is 2.
  • the second node determines that the DCI schedules 4 TBs, and determines that the HARQ process numbers corresponding to the 4 TBs are 0, 1, 2, 3.
  • the second node respectively determines the NDI corresponding to each TB according to the 4 bits of the fourth bit.
  • the value corresponding to the bit may refer to the value indicated by the bit, or may be the value converted from the binary value of the bit to the decimal system, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • the functional modules in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one process. In the device, it can also exist alone physically, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules.
  • the communication device may be as shown in FIG. 4, and the processing unit 301 may be the processor 402.
  • the processor 402 may be a CPU, or a digital processing module, and so on.
  • the transceiver unit 302 may be a communication interface 401, and the communication interface 401 may be a transceiver, an interface circuit such as a transceiver circuit, etc., or a transceiver chip, etc.
  • the network device further includes: a memory 403, configured to store a program executed by the processor 402.
  • the memory 403 may be a non-volatile memory, such as HDD or SSD, etc., or may also be a volatile memory, such as RAM.
  • the memory 403 is any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the processor 402 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 403, and is specifically configured to execute the actions of the aforementioned processing unit 301, which will not be repeated in this application.
  • connection medium between the communication interface 401, the processor 402, and the memory 403 is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 403, the processor 402, and the communication interface 401 are connected by a bus 404 in FIG. 4, and the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 4.
  • the connection modes between other components are only for schematic illustration. , Is not limited.
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 4 to represent, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present application may adopt the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware. Moreover, this application may adopt the form of a computer program product implemented on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) containing computer-usable program codes.
  • a computer-usable storage media including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • These computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can guide a computer or other programmable data processing equipment to work in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including the instruction device.
  • the device implements the functions specified in one process or multiple processes in the flowchart and/or one block or multiple blocks in the block diagram.
  • These computer program instructions can also be loaded on a computer or other programmable data processing equipment, so that a series of operation steps are executed on the computer or other programmable equipment to produce computer-implemented processing, so as to execute on the computer or other programmable equipment.
  • the instructions provide steps for implementing functions specified in a flow or multiple flows in the flowchart and/or a block or multiple blocks in the block diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Emergency Management (AREA)
  • Environmental & Geological Engineering (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Telephonic Communication Services (AREA)

Abstract

一种通信方法及设备，用于解决现有技术中连接态的eMTC终端设备接收紧急消息通知时复杂度较大，功耗较大的问题。该方法包括：第一设备确定第一控制信息，第一控制信息携带第一信息，第一信息用于指示紧急信息；第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息。第一设备向第二设备发送第一控制信息。并且，第一设备向第二设备发送紧急信息。本申请实施例提供的方法和设备可以提高网络的覆盖能力，可以应用于物联网，例如MTC、IoT、LTE-M、M2M等。

Description

一种通信方法及设备
本申请要求在2019年03月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为PCT/CN2019/080645、申请名称为“一种通信方法及设备”的PCT国际专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中，以及要求在2019年10月16日提交中国专利局、申请号为PCT/CN2019/111545、申请名称为“一种通信方法及设备”的PCT国际专利申请中除上述申请号为PCT/CN2019/080645的申请文件中全部内容以外的其它部分内容的优先权，该部分内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及设备。
背景技术
目前，第四代通信系统——演进型长期演进系统(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)在短期内(甚至长期)仍将为其用户设备(user equipment，UE)继续提供无线通信服务。特别地，增强型机器类通信(enhanced machine type communication，eMTC)系统及其他演化系统(比如，Further eMTC(FeMTC)，Even Further eMTC(eFeMTC)，additional MTC(AMTC))是在LTE基础上衍生的系统，eMTC系统及其他演化系统在LTE系统中、在LTE频段中进行工作。为了节省功耗，降低成本，eMTC终端的工作带宽通常可能较小，小于LTE系统的工作带宽，例如eMTC终端的工作带宽可以是一个窄带NB，一个NB包括6个连续的物理资源块(physical resourceblock，PRB)，一个PRB包括12个子载波(subcarrier，SC)。由于其低功耗、长休眠等特性，eMTC UE的电池寿命较长，预期可达10年左右。
为了节约eMTC终端功耗，降低eMTC终端检测复杂度，对于处于连接态的eMTC终端，只能检测用户特定搜索空间和用于传输终端组(UE group)传输功率控制信息的type 0公共搜索空间。
现有技术中，紧急信息(如地震和海啸预警系统(earthquake and tsunami warning system，ETWS)信息、商业流动警报服务(commercial mobile alert service，CMAS)信息、用于指示系统消息改变(system information modification)的信息等)携带在系统消息中，eMTC终端设备为了节省功耗不会很频繁的更新系统消息，因此遇到紧急消息时，基站通过寻呼消息或直接指示信息通知终端设备。但是寻呼消息或直接指示信息承载在type2公共搜索空间中，eMTC终端在连接态不会监测该搜索空间，因此连接态eMTC终端无法接收紧急消息通知。
一种可能的解决方案：通过允许连接态的eMTC终端设备同时监测type2搜索空间和用户特定搜索空间，也就是允许eMTC终端设备在连接态时接收寻呼消息或直接指示信息。但是，由于寻呼消息和用户特定搜索空间可能位于不同的窄带上，因此eMTC终端设备需要同时监测两个窄带，严重增加用户复杂度，增加用户功耗。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法及设备，用于解决现有技术中连接态的eMTC终端设备接收紧急消息通知时复杂度较大，功耗较大的问题。
第一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法，包括：第一设备确定第一控制信息，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息。所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述第一控制信息。并且，所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送所述紧急信息。
本申请实施例中，第一设备可以通过format 3、format 3A、format 6-0A、format 6-0B、format 6-1A、或format 6-1B的控制信息指示第二设备接收紧急信息。格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，承载在type 0公共搜索空间中，格式为format 6-0A、format 6-0B、format 6-1A和format 6-1B的控制信息为用户特定消息，承载在用户特定搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。
相比于现有技术中在用户特定的控制信息中增加比特来指示紧急信息的方式，本申请实施例中使用的上述这些格式的控制信息，不需要额外增加比特来指示紧急信息，因此可以避免增加控制信息开销，进而可以避免降低频谱效率，以及避免增加用户功耗。
此外，格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，也即第一设备，比如网络设备，可以通过一个控制信息将指示信息发给多个第二设备，比如终端设备，从而避免造成第一设备的资源浪费，节省第一设备的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，第一控制信息为下行控制信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个传输功率控制命令编号(transmit power control command number，TPC command number)用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。其中，TPC command number也可以称为TPC command，每个TPC command包含2比特。上述设计中，通过格式3控制信息或格式3A控制信息的TPC command来指示第一信息，可以使得第一控制信息可以在比特数不变的情况下指示第一信息，从而不需要额外增加比特来指示紧急信息，因此可以避免增加控制信息开销，进而可以避免降低频谱效率，以及避免增加用户功耗，并且，格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，也即第一设备，比如网络设备，可以通过一个控制信息将指示信息发给多个第二设备，比如终端设备，从而避免造成第一设备的资源浪费，节省第一设备的功耗。此外，format 3、format 3A的控制信息承载在type 0公共搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。并且对现有协议的改动较小。
在上述设计中，该K个TPC command可以不分配给任何第二设备来传输传输功率控制信息，而是用于指示第一信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息中还可以包括M个TPC command(或TPC command number)，所述M个TPC command用于指示H个所述第二设备的发送功控制命令，所述M和H为大于或等于0的整数。
在一种可能的设计中，所述K个TPC command为预定义的，或，所述K个TPC command为所述第一设备确定，并通过高层信令配置给所述第二设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中TPC command之外的Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。即，第一控制信息中包括Q个比特和N个TPC command，其中，Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，N个TPC command用于指示(或传输)多个第二设备的传输功率控制信息。上述设计中，由于格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，也即第一设备，比如网络设备，可以通过一个控制信息将指示信息发给多个第二设备，比如终端设备，从而避免造成第一设备的资源浪费，节省第一设备的功耗。此外，format 3、format 3A的控制信息承载在type 0公共搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗，并且对现有协议的改动较小。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中包括Q个比特，该Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。在上述设计中，第一控制信息可以只用于指示紧急信息通知，而可以不用于指示(或传输)传输功率控制信息。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述第一控制信息之前，所述第一设备可以确定第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息，并向所述第二设备发送所述第二信息。通过上述设计，第二设备可以在接收到第二信息后，在第一控制信息中获取第一信息，从而提高获取紧急信息通知的准确性。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式6-1A或格式6-1B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第一字段用于指示所述第一信息。上述设计中，格式为format 6-1A和format 6-1B的控制信息为用户特定消息，承载在用户特定搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。并且，上述设计中通过使用格式为format 6-1A和format 6-1B的控制信息的冗余状态来指示紧急信息，可以避免增加控制信息开销，从而可以减小用户功耗，提升系统资源利用率。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一字段可以为物理随机接入信道掩码索引(physical random access channel，PRACH Mask index)字段。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式6-0B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的调制编码方式字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第二字段用于指示所述第一信息；或者，所述第一控制信息可以为格式6-0A的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第三字段用于指示所述第一信息。上述设计中，格式为format 6-0A、format 6-0B的控制信息为用户特定消息，承载在用户特定搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。并且，上述设计中通过使用格式为format 6-0A、format 6-0B的控制信息的冗余状态来指示紧急信息，可以避免增加控制信息开销，从而可以减小用户功耗，提升系统资源利用率。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码(cyclic redundancy check，CRC)可以由第一加扰码进行加扰，其中，第一加扰码可以为系统信息无线临时标识符 (system information radio network temporary identifier，SI-RNTI)。
在一种可能的设计中，当第一控制信息的CRC由第二加扰码加扰时，第一控制信息可以只包括紧急信息通知或该第一控制信息用于指示第一信息或第一控制信息中包括紧急信息，其中第二加扰码可以为SI-RNTI。
在一种可能的设计中，所述紧急信息可以包括如下信息中的一个或多个：ETWS信息、CMAS信息、用于指示系统消息改变的信息。其中，ETWS信息、CMAS信息、用于指示系统消息改变的信息也可以分别称为ETWS指示或ETWS通知(ETWS notification或ETWSindication)、CMAS指示或CMAS通知(CMAS notification或CMASindication)、系统消息改变指示或系统消息改变通知(system information modification notification或system information modification indication)。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法，包括：第二设备接收第一设备发送的第一控制信息，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息。所述第二设备根据所述第一控制信息中的所述第一信息接收所述紧急信息。
本申请实施例中，第一设备可以通过format 3、format 3A、format 6-0A、format 6-0B、format 6-1A、或format 6-1B的控制信息指示第二设备接收紧急信息。格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，承载在type 0公共搜索空间中，格式为format 6-0A、format 6-0B、format 6-1A和format 6-1B的控制信息为用户特定消息，承载在用户特定搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。
相比于现有技术中在用户特定的控制信息中增加比特来指示紧急信息的方式，本申请实施例中使用的上述这些格式的控制信息，不需要额外增加比特来指示紧急信息，因此可以避免增加控制信息开销，进而可以避免降低频谱效率，以及避免增加用户功耗。
此外，格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，也即第一设备，比如网络设备，可以通过一个控制信息将指示信息发给多个第二设备，比如终端设备，从而避免造成第一设备的资源浪费，节省第一设备的功耗。
在一种可能的设计中，第一控制信息为下行控制信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个TPC command number用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。其中，TPC command number也可以称为TPC command，每个TPC command包含2比特。上述设计中，可以通过格式3控制信息或格式3A控制信息的TPC command来指示第一信息，使得第一控制信息可以在比特数的情况下指示第一信息，从而不需要额外增加比特来指示紧急信息，因此可以避免增加控制信息开销，进而可以避免降低频谱效率，以及避免增加用户功耗，并且，格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，也即第一设备，比如网络设备，可以通过一个控制信息将指示信息发给多个第二设备，比如终端设备，从而避免造成第一设备的资源浪费，节省第一设备的功耗。此外，format 3、format 3A的控制信息承载在type 0公共搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息 不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。并且对现有协议的改动较小。
在上述设计中，该K个TPC command可以不分配给任何第二设备来传输传输功率控制信息，而是用于指示第一信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息中还可以包括M个TPC command(或TPC command number)，所述M个TPC command用于指示H个所述第二设备的发送功控制命令，所述M和H为大于或等于0的整数。
在一种可能的设计中，所述K个TPC command可以为预定义的，或，所述K个TPC command可以为所述第二设备通过接收所述第一设备发送的高层信令确定的。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中TPC command之外的Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。即，第一控制信息中包括Q个比特和N个TPC command，其中，Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，N个TPC command用于指示(或传输)多个第二设备的传输功率控制信息。上述设计中，由于格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，也即第一设备，比如网络设备，可以通过一个控制信息将指示信息发给多个第二设备，比如终端设备，从而避免造成第一设备的资源浪费，节省第一设备的功耗。此外，format 3、format 3A的控制信息承载在type 0公共搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗，并且对现有协议的改动较小。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中包括Q个比特，该Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。在上述设计中，第一控制信息可以只用于指示紧急信息通知，而可以不用于指示(或传输)传输功率控制信息。
在一种可能的设计中，在第二设备接收第一设备发送的第一控制信息之前，所述第二设备可以接收所述第一设备发送的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息。通过上述设计，第二设备可以在接收到第二信息后，在第一控制信息中获取第一信息，从而提高获取紧急信息通知的准确性。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式6-1A或格式6-1B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第一字段用于指示所述第一信息。上述设计中，格式为format 6-1A和format 6-1B的控制信息为用户特定消息，承载在用户特定搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。并且，上述设计中通过使用格式为format 6-1A和format 6-1B的控制信息的冗余状态来指示紧急信息，可以避免增加控制信息开销，从而可以减小用户功耗，提升系统资源利用率。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一字段可以为PRACH Mask index字段。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式6-0B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的调制编码方式字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第二字段用于指示所述第一信息；或者，所述第一控制信息可以为格式6-0A的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第三字段用于指示所述第一信息。上述设计中，格式为format 6-0A、format 6-0B的控制信息为用户特定消 息，承载在用户特定搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。并且，上述设计中通过使用格式为format 6-0A、format 6-0B的控制信息的冗余状态来指示紧急信息，可以避免增加控制信息开销，从而可以减小用户功耗，提升系统资源利用率。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一控制信息的CRC可以由第一加扰码进行加扰，其中，第一加扰码可以为SI-RNTI。
在一种可能的设计中，当第一控制信息的CRC由第二加扰码加扰时，第一控制信息可以只包括紧急信息通知或该第一控制信息用于指示第一信息或第一控制信息中包括紧急信息，其中第二加扰码可以为SI-RNTI。
在一种可能的设计中，所述紧急信息可以包括如下信息中一个或多个：ETWS信息、CMAS信息、用于指示系统消息改变的信息。其中，ETWS信息、CMAS信息、用于指示系统消息改变的信息也可以分别称为ETWS指示或ETWS通知(ETWS notification或ETWSindication)、CMAS指示或CMAS通知(CMAS notification或CMASindication)、系统消息改变指示或系统消息改变通知(system information modification notification或system information modification indication)。
第三方面，本申请提供一种装置，该装置可以是第一设备、或者第二设备，还可以是芯片。该装置具有实现上述第一方面、或者第二方面任一实施例的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。
第四方面，提供了一种装置，包括：处理器、通信接口和存储器。通信接口用于该装置与其他装置之间传输信息、和/或消息、和/或数据。该存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当该装置运行时，该处理器执行该存储器存储的该计算机执行指令，以使该装置执行如上述第一方面或第一方面中任一所述的通信方法、或者上述第二方面或第二方面中任一所述的通信方法。
第五方面，本申请还提供一种系统，该系统包括上述第一方面的任一实施例中的第一设备、上述第二方面的任一实施例中的第二设备。
第六方面，本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。
第七方面，本申请还提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。
本申请提供的通信方法可以应用于各类通信系统中，例如，可以是物联网(internet of things，IoT)、窄带物联网(narrow band internet of things，NB-IoT)、长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)，也可以是第五代(5G)通信系统，还可以是LTE与5G混合架构、也可以是5G新无线(newradio，NR)系统、全球移动通信系统(global system for mobile communication，GSM)，移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunications system，UMTS)，码分多址接入(code division multiple access，CDMA)系统，以及未来通信发展中出现的新的通信系统等。只要通信系统中存在一个实体可以发送用于调度传输块的控制信息，以及发送、接收传输块，另一个实体可以接收用于调度传输块的控制信息，以及接收、发送传输块，均可以采用本申请实施例提供的通信方法。
本申请实施例中涉及的终端设备，是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，例如，具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。终端设备也可以是连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。终端设备可以通过无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)与一个或多个核心网进行通信。终端设备也可以称为无线终端、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station)，移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、用户设备(user device)、或用户装备(user equipment)等等。终端设备可以是移动终端，如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)和具有移动终端的计算机，例如，可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置，它们与无线接入网交换语言和/或数据。例如，终端设备还可以是个人通信业务(personal communication service，PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、等设备。常见的终端设备例如包括：手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device，MID)、可穿戴设备，例如智能手表、智能手环、计步器等，但本申请实施例不限于此。
本申请实施例中所涉及的网络设备，可以用于将收到的空中帧与网络协议(internet protocol，IP)分组进行相互转换，作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器，其中接入网的其余部分可以包括IP网络等。网络设备还可以协调对空中接口的属性管理。例如，网络设备可以是全球移动通信系统(global system for mobilecommunication，GSM)或码分多址(code division multiple access，CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station，BTS)，也可以是宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)中的基站(NodeB)，还可以是LTE中的演进型基站(evolutional Node B，eNB或e-NodeB)，还可以是新无线控制器(new radio controller，NR controller)，可以是5G系统中的gNode B(gNB)，可以是集中式网元(centralized unit)，可以是新无线基站，可以是射频拉远模块，可以是微基站，可以是中继(relay)，可以是分布式网元(distributed unit)，可以是接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)或传输点(transmission point，TP)或者任何其它无线接入设备，但本申请实施例不限于此。网络设备可以覆盖1个或多个小区。
参阅图1所示，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统，该通信系统包括网络设备和六个终端设备，即UE1～UE6。在该通信系统中，UE1～UE6可以发送上行数据给网络设备，网络设备可以接收UE1～UE6发送的上行数据。此外，UE4～UE6也可以组成一个子通信系统。网络设备可以发送下行信息给UE1、UE2、UE3、UE5，UE5可以基于设备到设备 (device-to-device，D2D)技术发送下行信息给UE4、UE6。图1仅是一种示意图，并不对通信系统的类型，以及通信系统内包括的设备的数量、类型等进行具体限定。
本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题，同样适用。
在通信系统中，UE可能处于三种状态：空闲(idle)态、非激活态(inactive)和连接态(connected)。connected态UE可以通过基站动态调度与基站进行通信，传输数据，而对于idle态UE而言，其不能通过基站动态调度来传输数据，需要首先进行随机接入，建立RRC连接以后才能够进行数据的传输，或者是在随机接入过程中的消息3中携带少量的上行数据。Inactive态可以看做是这两种状态的一种中间状态，UE和核心网保留了connected态时无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)消息的上下文，因此相比于idle态可以以更快速度的进入connected态。根据目前LTE协议的规定，在UE由RRCconnected态转入idle态的时候，RRC的配置消息是不保留的，但是由connected态转为inactive态的时候是保留RRC消息的上下文的。
目前，第四代通信系统——演进型长期演进系统(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)在短期内(甚至长期)仍将为其用户设备(user equipment，UE)继续提供无线通信服务。特别地，增强型机器类通信(enhanced machine type communication，eMTC)系统及其他演化系统(比如，Further eMTC(FeMTC)，Even Further eMTC(eFeMTC)，additional MTC(AMTC))是在LTE基础上衍生的系统，eMTC系统及其他演化系统在LTE系统中、在LTE频段中进行工作。为了节省功耗，降低成本，eMTC终端的工作带宽通常可能较小，小于LTE系统的工作带宽，例如eMTC终端的工作带宽可以是一个窄带NB，一个NB包括6个连续的物理资源块(physical resourceblock，PRB)，一个PRB包括12个子载波(subcarrier，SC)。由于其低功耗、长休眠等特性，eMTC UE的电池寿命较长，预期可达10年左右。
LTE中终端设备通过监测控制信道搜索空间来获得调度信息，进而进行数据调度。LTE中的控制信道搜索空间可以分为用户特定搜索空间和公共搜索空间，用户特定搜索空间是每个用户配置的，每个用户分配一个特定的搜索空间。公共搜索空间是一组用户或一个小区用户都会去监测的搜索空间，一般发送的为小区的公共消息。为了节约终端功耗，降低终端检测复杂度，对于连接态的eMTC终端，只要求检测用户特定搜索空间和用于传输终端组功控的type 0公共搜索空间。而紧急信息(如地震和海啸预警系统(earthquake and tsunami warning system，ETWS)信息、商业流动警报服务(commercial mobile alert service，CMAS)信息、用于指示系统消息改变(system information modification)的信息等)是携带在系统消息中，eMTC终端设备为了节省功耗不会很频繁的更新系统消息，因此遇到紧急消息时，基站需要通知终端设备去接收。现有技术中，紧急信息通知在寻呼消息中或直接指示信息中，但是寻呼消息中或直接指示信息是type2公共搜索空间，eMTC终端设备在连接态不会监测该搜索空间，因此无法在连接态接收紧急消息通知。那么eMTC终端设备只能回退到空闲态接收寻呼消息或直接指示信息来接收紧急信息通知，然后接收紧急信息，这样延时较长且增加终端设备功耗。
针对这个问题，一种可能的解决方案：通过允许连接态的eMTC终端设备同时监测 type2搜索空间和用户特定搜索空间，也就是允许eMTC终端设备在连接态时接收寻呼消息或直接指示信息。但是，由于寻呼消息和用户特定搜索空间可能位于不同的窄带上，因此连接态的eMTC终端设备需要同时监测两个窄带，严重增加用户复杂度，增加用户功耗。并且，这种方式对现有协议改动较大。
基于此本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及设备，用于解决现有技术中连接态的eMTC终端设备接收紧急消息通知时复杂度较大，功耗较大的问题。其中，方法和装置是基于同一发明构思的，由于方法及设备解决问题的原理相似，因此装置与方法的实施可以相互参见，重复之处不再赘述。
本申请实施例中所涉及的多个，是指两个或两个以上。
需要理解的是，在本申请的描述中，“第一”、“第二”等词汇，仅用于区分描述的目的，而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性，也不能理解为指示或暗示顺序。
参见图2，为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程图。该方法可以应用于图1所示通信系统中的终端设备，该方法包括：
S201，第一设备确定第一控制信息。其中，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式(format)3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为format3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为format6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为format6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为format6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为format6-1B的控制信息。
其中，所述紧急信息可以包括如下信息中一个或多个：ETWS信息、CMAS信息、用于指示system information modification的信息。
本申请实施例中，ETWS信息、CMAS信息、用于指示系统消息改变的信息也可以分别称为ETWS指示或ETWS通知(ETWS notification或ETWSindication)、CMAS指示或CMAS通知(CMAS notification或CMASindication)、系统消息改变指示或系统消息改变通知(system information modification notification或system information modification indication)。
示例性的，第一控制信息可以为LTE eMTC系统中的下行控制信息，NR系统的下行控制信息等等，这里不做具体限定。为了方便描述，下面以第一控制信息为下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)为例。
作为一种示例性说明，所述第一信息在指示紧急信息时具体可以指示紧急信息的类型和/或紧急信息的通知等。
此外，若第一设备确定没有紧急信息，第一设备还可以通过第一控制信息指示没有紧急信息。
其中，第一设备可以为网络设备，第二设备为终端设备。或者，第一设备也可以为终端设备，第二设备为网络设备。或者，第一设备也可以为其他具有发送能力的设备，第二设备可以为其他具有接收能力的设备。
S202，所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述第一控制信息。对应的，第二设备接收所述第一控制信息。
S203，所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送所述紧急信息。
S204，所述第二设备根据所述第一控制信息中的所述第一信息接收所述紧急信息。
本申请实施例中，第一设备可以通过format 3、format 3A、format 6-0A、format 6-0B、 format 6-1A、或format 6-1B的控制信息指示第二设备接收紧急信息。格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，承载在type 0公共搜索空间中，格式为format 6-0A、format 6-0B、format 6-1A和format 6-1B的控制信息为用户特定消息，承载在用户特定搜索空间中，因此第二设备对于接收紧急信息不需要监测type2搜索空间，从而可以不增加用户复杂度，降低用户功耗。
相比于现有技术中在用户特定的控制信息中增加比特来指示紧急信息的方式，本申请实施例中使用的上述这些格式的控制信息，不需要额外增加比特来指示紧急信息，因此可以避免增加控制信息开销，进而可以避免降低频谱效率，以及避免增加用户功耗。
此外，格式为format 3和format 3A的控制信息为群组控制信息，也即第一设备，比如网络设备，可以通过一个控制信息将指示信息发给多个第二设备，比如终端设备，从而避免造成第一设备的资源浪费，节省第一设备的功耗。
一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个传输功率控制命令编号(transmit power control command number，TPC command number)用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。其中，该K个TPC command number可以不分配给任何第二设备来传输传输功率控制信息，而是用于指示第一信息。
此外，所述第一下行控制信息中还可以包括M个TPC command number，所述M个TPC command number用于指示M个所述第二设备的传输功率控制命令，或者，所述M个TPC command number用于指示H个所述第二设备的传输功率控制命令，M为大于或等于0的整数，H为大于M的整数。也就是，第一控制信息可以包括K+M个TPC command number，其中的K个TPC command number用于指示第一信息，剩下的M个TPC command number依然用于指示传输功率控制命令。示例性的，剩下的M个TPC command number中一个TPC command number可以指示一个第二设备的传输功率控制命令，也可以指示多个第二设备的传输功率控制命令。
其中，TPC command number也可以称为TPC command。每个TPC command包含2比特。为了方便描述，下面统一称为TPC command。
其中，所述K个TPC command可以为预定义的，例如，第一设备以及第二设备预先定义K个TPC command的数量、索引、编号等。或者，所述K个TPC command为所述第一设备确定，并通过高层信令配置给所述第二设备的，如第一设备可以通过系统信息配置或者无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令或者媒体接入控制控制元素(media access control control element，MAC CE)信令等高层信令配置K个TPC command的数量、索引、编号等。
下面以K等于1为例对TPC command指示第一信息进行具体说明。一个TPC command包括两个比特，因此TPC command包括四种取值状态，分别为“00”，“01”，“10”，“11”，可以选择任意两种取值状态来分别指示第一信息以及第三信息，如00指示第三信息即没有紧急信息，01指示第一信息即有紧急信息，如表1所示。
表1
取值状态 00 01 10 11
含义 第三信息(没有紧急信息) 第一信息(有紧急信息)    
或者，也可以选择任意三种取值状态来分别指示第一信息以及第三信息，如00指示 第三信息(即没有紧急信息)，01指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为ETWS通知，10指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为CMAS通知，如表2所示。
表2
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000001
或者，也可以用四种取值状态来分别指示第一信息以及第三信息，如00指示第三信息(即没有紧急信息)，01指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为ETWS通知，10指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为CMAS通知，11指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为system information modification通知，如表3-1所示。
表3-1
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000002
或者，也可以用2比特指示第一信息以及第三信息，例如两个比特中的其中一个比特用于指示ETWS通知，两个比特中的另外一个比特用于指示CMAS通知，0表示没有该类型的紧急信息，1表示有该类型的紧急信息。如例如，用高位比特指示CMAS通知，低位比特指示CMAS通知，如表3-2所示，则00指示第三信息(即没有紧急信息，也就是既没有ETWS通知也没有CMAS通知)，01指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为ETWS通知，10指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为CMAS通知，11指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为ETWS通知和CMAS通知，如表3-3所示。
表3-2
比特 1(低位比特) 2(高位比特)
含义 ETWS通知 CMAS通知
表3-3
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000003
以K＝2为例来说明，两个TPC command包括4个比特，其中可以用3比特指示第一信息以及第三信息，例如3个比特中的第一个比特(最高位比特)用于指示ETWS通知，3个比特中的第二个比特(中间位置的比特)用于指示CMAS通知，3个比特中的第三个比特(最低位比特)用于指示系统消息改变，如表3-4所示。其中，0表示没有该类型的紧急信息，1表示有该类型的紧急信息。如000指示第三信息(即没有紧急信息)，010指 示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为CMAS通知，100指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为ETWS通知，110指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为ETWS通知和CMAS通知，111指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为ETWS通知、CMAS通知和system information modification通知，001指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为system information modification通知，101指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为ETWS通知和system information modification通知，011指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息为CMAS通知和system information modification通知，如表3-5所示。
表3-4
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000004
表3-5
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000005
应理解，上述表1～表3-5仅是一种示例性说明，并不对第一信息指示的紧急信息的类型、第一信息对应的取值状态、第三信息对应的取值状态等进行具体限定。同时应理解上述表格所的不同比特或不同的状态所对应的具体含义不做具体限定，只要是包含的比特数以及所指示的内容与本申请实施例提供的方法是相同的都是本申请实施例所保护的内容。
另一种示例性说明中，第一控制信息可以为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中TPC command之外的Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。也就是，第一控制信息中包括Q个比特和N个TPC command，其中，Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，N个TPC command用于指示(或传输)多个第二设备的传输功率控制信息。或者，第一控制信息仅包括Q个比特，此时第一控制信息可以用于指示紧急信息通知，而可以不用于指示(或传输)传输功率控制信息。
例如，Q可以等于1，该1比特有两种取值状态，分别为“0”和“1”，因此，可以通过增加的这1比特取值为0时可以指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)，此外，该比特取值为1时还可以指示第三信息(即没有紧急信息)。或者，增加的这1比特取值为1时可以指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)，此外，该比特取值为0时还可以指示第三信息(即没有紧急信息)。
又例如，Q也可以等于2，该2比特有四种取值状态，分别为“00”，“01”，“10”，“11”，因此，可以通过增加的这2比特指示第一信息以及第三信息，通过增加两个比特来指示第一信息的方式具体可以参阅TPC command通过不同取值状态来指示第一信息的方式，如表1～表3-1所示，这里不再重复赘述。或者，该2比特指示第一信息以及第三信息时，具体可以通过两个比特分别指示两种类型的紧急信息，两个比特分别指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，具体可以参阅TPC command通过2个比特指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，如表3-2～表3-3所示，这里不再重复赘述。
又例如，Q也可以等于3，3比特指示第一信息以及第三信息时，具体可以通过三个比特分别指示三种类型的紧急信息，三个比特分别指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，具体可以参阅TPC command通过3个比特指示三种类型的紧急信息的方式，如表3-4～表3-5所示，这里不再重复赘述。
在具体实施中，在所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述第一控制信息之前，所述第一设备还可以确定第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息，并向所述第二设备发送所述第二信息。从而第二设备在接收到第二信息后，可以确定在第一控制信息中获取第一信息。
再一种示例性说中，所述第一控制信息还可以为格式6-1A或格式6-1B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段(resource block assignment)的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第一字段可以用于指示所述第一信息。
在具体实施中，所述第一字段可以为物理随机接入信道掩码索引(physical random access channel mask index，PRACH Mask index)字段。
作为一种示例，在频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)时第一字段可以在取值为13或14或15时指示有紧急信息。或者第一字段可以在13、14、15中选择任意两个取值状态分别指示两个紧急信息通知，其中，两个紧急信息通知可以为ETWS通知、CMAS通知、system info modification通知中的任意两个紧急信息通知，如13指示ETWS通知，14指示CMAS通知。或者，或者第一字段可以通过13、14、15这三个取值状态分别指示三个紧急信息通知，其中，三个紧急信息通知可以分别为ETWS通知、CMAS通知、system info modification通知，如13指示ETWS通知，14指示CMAS通知，15指示system info modification通知，如表4所示。
作为另一种示例，在时分双工时第一字段可以在取值为7或8或9时指示有紧急信息。或者第一字段可以在7、8、9中选择任意两个取值状态分别指示两个紧急信息通知，其中，两个紧急信息通知可以为ETWS通知、CMAS通知、system info modification通知中的任意两个紧急信息通知，如7指示ETWS通知，8指示CMAS通知。或者，或者第一字段可以通过7、8、9这三个取值状态分别指示三个紧急信息通知，其中，三个紧急信息通知可以分别为ETWS通知、CMAS通知、system info modification通知，如7指示ETWS通知，8指示CMAS通知，9指示system info modification通知，如表4所示。
表4
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000007
另外一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式6-0B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的MCS字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第二字段用于指示所述第一信息。
具体实施中，第二字段可以为第一控制信息中除MCS字段以及上下行区分标志位(Flag for format 6-0B/format 6-1B differentiation)以外的任一字段。
在一些实施例中，第二字段可以通过不同的状态来指示第一信息。具体的，第二字段可以通过第一状态来指示第一信息，其中，第一状态可以包括一个或多个状态。若第一状态包括一个状态，则该状态可以指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)。若第一状态包括两个状态，则这两个状态可以分别指示两个类型的紧急信息通知，若第一状态包括三个状态，则这三个状态可以分别指示三个类型的紧急信息通知。其中，第一状态中每个状态可以至少包括一个比特的取值为1。
下面以第一字段为重复次数(repetition number)字段。repetition number字段可以通过一个取值状态来指示第一信息，如，repetition number字段取值为111时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)。repetition number字段可以通过两个取值状态来指示第一信息，如，repetition number字段取值为111时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为ETWS，repetition number字段取值为110时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为CMAS。repetition number字段可以通过3个取值状态来指示第一信息，如，repetition number字段取值为111时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为ETWS，repetition number字段取值为110时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为CMAS，repetition number字段取值为100时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为system info modification。需要说明的是，这里仅为一种示例性说明，并不对第一字段的类型、第一状态所包括状态的数量、紧急信息的类型、每个紧急信息的类型对应的取值状态等进行具体限定。
在另一些实施例中，第二字段可以通过不同的比特位来指示第一信息。第二字段通过不同比特位指示第一信息的方式，具体可以TPC command通过不同比特指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，如第二字段通过2个比特分别指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，具体可以参阅TPC command通过2个比特指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，如表3-2～表3-3所示，这里不再重复赘述。第二字段通过3个比特分别指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，具体可以参阅TPC command通过3个比特指示三种类型的紧急信息的方式，如表3-4～表3-5所示，这里不再重复赘述。
再一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息可以为格式6-0A的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第三字段用于指示所述第一信息。
在具体实施中，第三字段可以为第一控制信息中除resource block assignment以及上下行区分字段(Flag for format 6-0A/format 6-1A differentiation)以外的任一字段。
在一些实施例中，第三字段可以通过不同的状态来指示第一信息。具体的，第三字段可以通过第一状态来指示第一信息，其中，第一状态可以包括一个或多个状态。若第一状态包括一个状态，则该状态可以指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)。若第一状态包括两个状态，则这两个状态可以分别指示两个类型的紧急信息，若第一状态包括三个状态，则这三个状态可以分别指示三个类型的紧急信息。其中，第一状态中每个状态可以至少包括一个比特的取值为1。
下面以第三字段为调制和编码方案(modulation and coding scheme，MCS)字段，MCS字段可以通过一个取值状态来指示第一信息，如，MCS字段取值为111时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)。MCS字段可以通过两个取值状态来指示第一信息，如，MCS字段取值为111时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为ETWS，MCS字段取值为110时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为CMAS。MCS字段可以通过3个取值状态来指示第一信息，如，MCS字段取值为111时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为ETWS，MCS字段取值为110时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为CMAS，MCS字段取值为100时指示第一信息(即有紧急信息)且紧急信息的类型为system info modification。需要说明的是，这里仅为一种示例性说明，并不对第一字段的类型、第一状态所包括状态的数量、紧急信息的类型、每个紧急信息的类型对应的取值状态等进行具体限定。
在另一些实施例中，第三字段可以通过不同的比特位来指示第一信息。第三字段通过不同比特位指示第一信息的方式，具体可以TPC command通过不同比特指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，如第三字段通过2个比特分别指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，具体可以参阅TPC command通过2个比特指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，如表3-2～表3-3所示，这里不再重复赘述。第三字段通过3个比特分别指示两种类型的紧急信息的方式，具体可以参阅TPC command通过3个比特指示三种类型的紧急信息的方式，如表3-4～表3-5所示，这里不再重复赘述。
作为一种可能的实施方式，上述几种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码(cyclic redundancy check，CRC)可以由第一加扰码进行加扰，其中，第一加扰码可以为系统信息无线网络临时标识(system information radio network temporary identifier，SI-RNTI)。
一种示例性说明中，当第一控制信息的CRC由第二加扰码加扰时，第一控制信息可以只包括紧急信息通知或者第一控制信息包括紧急信息通知或该第一控制信息用于指示或传输第一信息，其中第二加扰码可以为SI-RNTI。可选的，此时该第一控制信息中的其余比特均设置为第一状态，如全部设置为1或全部设置为0。这样可以用该第一状态来进一步检测DCI是否正确，减少虚警概率。
又一种示例性说明中，当第一控制信息的CRC由SI-RNTI进行加扰时，第一控制信息中的第四字段可以用于指示第一信息，其中，第四字段可以为第一控制信息中的任意字段。
基于与方法实施例的同一发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置的结构可以如图3所示，包括处理单元301和收发单元302。
一种具体实施方式中，该装置具体用于实现图2所述实施例中第一设备的功能，该装置可以是第一设备本身，也可以是第一设备中的芯片或芯片组或芯片中用于执行相关方法 功能的一部分。具体的，处理单元301，用于确定第一控制信息，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息。收发单元302，用于向第二设备发送所述处理单元301确定的所述第一控制信息；以及，向所述第二设备发送所述紧急信息。
其中，所述紧急信息可以包括如下信息中一个或多个：ETWS通知、CMAS通知、用于指示系统消息改变的通知。
一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个TPC command number可以用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。
其中，所述K个TPC command number可以为预定义的，或，所述K个TPC command number可以为所述第一设备确定，并通过高层信令配置给所述第二设备。
另一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中TPC command number之外的Q个比特可以用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。
一种实现方式中，所述处理单元301，还可以用于：在所述收发单元302向第二设备发送所述第一控制信息之前，确定第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息。所述收发单元302，还可以用于：向所述第二设备发送所述处理单元301确定的所述第二信息。
又一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A或格式6-1B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第一字段可以用于指示所述第一信息。
再一种示例性说明中，所述第一字段可以为PRACH Mask index字段。
还有一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的调制编码方式字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第二字段可以用于指示所述第一信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第三字段可以用于指示所述第一信息。
在一些实施例中，所述第一控制信息的CRC由SI-RNTI进行加扰。
另一种具体实施方式中，该装置具体用于实现图2所述实施例中第二设备的功能，该装置可以是第二设备本身，也可以是第二设备中的芯片或芯片组或芯片中用于执行相关方法功能的一部分。具体的，收发单元302，用于接收数据；处理单元301，用于控制所述收发单元302接收第一设备发送的第一控制信息，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息；以及，根据所述第一控制信息中的所述第一信息控制所述收发单元302接收所述紧急信息。
其中，所述紧急信息可以包括如下信息中一个或多个：ETWS通知、CMAS通知、用于指示系统消息改变的通知。
一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个TPC command number可以用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。
其中，所述K个TPC command number可以为预定义的，或，所述K个TPC command number也可以为所述第二设备通过接收所述第一设备发送的高层信令确定的。
又一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的Q个比特可以用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。
一种实现方式中，所述处理单元301，还可以用于：在控制所述收发单元302接收第一设备发送的第一控制信息之前，控制所述收发单元302接收所述第一设备发送的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息。
再一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A或格式6-1B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第一字段可以用于指示所述第一信息。
进一步的，所述第一字段可以为PRACH Mask index字段。
另一种示例性说明中，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的调制编码方式字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第二字段可以用于指示所述第一信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第三字段可以用于指示所述第一信息。
在一些实施例中，所述第一控制信息的CRC由SI-RNTI进行加扰。
本申请提供另一种通信方法。该方法可以应用于图1所示通信系统中的终端设备，该方法包括：
在通信系统中，一个下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)调度一个传输块(transport block，TB)或调度多个传输块。DCI调度一个TB时，DCI还指示一个混合自动重发请求(hybrid automatic retransmission request，HARQ)进程号(process number)。例如，用户设备(user equipment，UE)支持8个HARQ进程，则DCI用3个比特在0至7中指示该DCI调度的这个TB所用的HARQ进程号。DCI调度一个TB时，DCI还指示该DCI调度的数据传输携带的是新传TB还是重传TB。
为了降低DCI传输的开销，节省传输资源，可以用一个DCI调度多个TB。当一个DCI调度多个传输块时，DCI可以指示多个HARQ进程号，其中每个HARQ进程号都对应或者关联一个传输块的传输。
为了进一步降低一个DCI调度多个传输块时的开销，需要约束多个传输块所用的HARQ进程号是连续的，还需要固定多个HARQ进程号中的第一个HARQ进程号。例如，一个DCI调度了N个传输块，且N个传输块中的第一个传输块的HARQ进程号是固定的，例如固定为0，则N个传输块中的其余的N-1个传输块的HARQ进程号是1、2、……、N-1。
对于DCI能够调度最多N个传输块的情况，需要N个比特按照位图方式指示每个传输块的新数据指示(new data indicator，NDI)信息，还需要N个比特按照位图方式指示每 个传输块的HARQ进程号是否被使用，因此总共需要2N个比特指示调度的传输块个数及各个传输块的NDI信息。因此，存在控制信道指示传输块个数及各个传输块的NDI信息时的开销过大的问题。
1、一种信息处理方法，其特征在于，包括：
终端设备从网络设备接收下行控制信息，其中，所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个传输块TB，所述N是正整数；
所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息包括第一字段时，所述第一字段包括(N+2)个比特b 0，b 1，…，b N+1；
所述终端设备根据所述第一字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，其中，所述L是正整数，且1正整数，；
所述L大于1时，所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB中能够既有新传TB也有重传TB；
所述第一字段中j个连续比特b k，b k+1，…，b k+j-1中，只有1个比特的比特状态为1，其它的j-1个比特的比特状态都为0，所述j是正整数，且所述j＝N+1-L，所述k是预先规定的整数，所述k＝0，或所述k＝L+1；
所述k＝0，所述第一字段中b j比特的比特状态为1，且所述第一字段中L个连续比特b j+1，b j+2，…，b N+1携带所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的新数据指示NDI信息；
或者，所述k＝L+1，所述第一字段中b L比特的比特状态为1，且所述第一字段中L个连续比特b 0，b 1，…，b L-1携带所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的NDI信息；
所述终端设备确定所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ进程号；
所述终端设备根据确定的所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ进程号，和所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息，发送所述L个TB，或者接收所述L个TB。
2、根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述L、所述L个TB中第一TB的HARQ进程号及所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息是根据第一字段的比特状态与TB个数、第一TB的HARQ进程号、L个TB的NDI信息之间的对应关系确定的，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的一个TB。
3、根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备确定所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ进程号，包括：
所述终端设备以b 0比特作为起始比特，确定b i比特是所述(N+2)个比特中第一个比特状态为1的比特，第一TB的HARQ进程号是i，所述终端设备根据所述第一TB的HARQ进程号以及L个HARQ进程的进程号之间的第一关联关系确定所述L个TB中除所述第一TB以外的其它TB的HARQ进程号，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的一个TB，所述L个HARQ进程是所述L个TB对应的HARQ进程；
或者，
所述终端设备以b L+1比特作为起始比特，确定b i比特是所述(N+2)个比特中第一个比特状态为1的比特，第一TB的HARQ进程号是i-L-1，所述终端设备根据所述第一TB的HARQ进程号以及L个HARQ进程的进程号之间的第一关联关系确定所述L个TB中除所述第一TB以外的其它TB的HARQ进程号，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的一个TB，所述L个HARQ进程是所述L个TB对应的HARQ进程。
4、根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述终端设备以b 0比特作为起始比特，确定b m比特为所述(N+2)个比特中第二个比特 状态为1的比特，所述j＝m，所述L＝N+1-m；或者，
所述终端设备以b N+1比特作为起始比特，确定b m比特是所述(N+2)个比特中从右往左第二个比特状态为1的比特，所述j＝N+1-m，所述L＝m。
5、根据权利要求1、3或4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息是根据L个比特b j+1，b j+2，…，b N+1按照位图方式确定的；或者，
所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息是根据L个比特b 0，b 1，…，b L-1按照位图方式确定的。
6、根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述终端设备根据所述下行控制信息中的第一比特，确定所述下行控制信息是否包括所述第一字段，其中，所述第一比特是1个比特；
所述第一比特的比特状态为1，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息包括所述第一字段，且所述N是大于1的正整数。
7、根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述终端设备根据所述下行控制信息中的第一比特，确定所述下行控制信息是否包括所述第一字段，其中，所述第一比特是1个比特；
所述第一比特的比特状态为0，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息不包括所述第一字段；
所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息包括第二比特，其中，所述第二比特是1个比特；
所述第二比特的比特状态为1，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度的所有TB都是新传TB，或者所述下行控制信息调度的所有TB都是重传TB；或者，
所述第二比特的比特状态为1，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度包括第二字段和/或第三字段，所述第二字段用于指示所述最多N个TB的HARQ process number和/或第一标识信息，所述第三字段用于指示第二标识信息；
所述第二比特的比特状态为0，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB；或者，
所述第二比特的比特状态为0，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB或2个TB，且所述下行控制信息包括第四字段和/或第五字段，所述第四字段用于指示HARQ process number和/或NDI信息，所述第五字段用于指示冗余版本(Redundancy Version，RV)；
所述第二比特的比特状态为0，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息只能调度最多2个TB，且所述下行控制信息包括第三字段和/或第四字段，所述第三字段用于指示HARQ process number和/或NDI信息，所述第四字段用于指示冗余版本(Redundancy Version，RV)。
8、根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述终端设备根据所述下行控制信息中的第一比特，确定所述下行控制信息是否包括所述第一字段，其中所述第一比特是1个比特；
所述第一比特的比特状态为0，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息不包括所述第一字段；
所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息包括第二比特，其中所述第二比特是1个比特；
所述第二比特的比特状态为1，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度的所有TB都是新传TB，或者所述下行控制信息调度的所有TB都是重传TB；或者，
所述第二比特的比特状态为1，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度包括第二字段和/或第三字段，所述第二字段用于指示所述最多N个TB的HARQ process number和/或第一标识信息，所述第三字段用于指示第二标识信息，所述终端设备根据所述第二字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，其中，所述L是正整数，且1正L≤N；
所述第二比特的比特状态为0，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息还包括第三比特，所述第三比特是1个比特，且所述第三比特的比特状态固定为1；
所述终端设备根据所述第三比特确定所述下行控制信息只能调度1个或2个TB。
9、一种信息处理方法，其特征在于，包括：
网络设备确定下行控制信息调度的传输块TB个数L，其中，所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，所述N是正整数，所述L是正整数，且1正整数，；
所述网络设备确定所述L个TB的HARQ进程号；
所述网络设备确定所述L个TB的新数据指示NDI信息；
所述网络设备向终端设备发送所述下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息能够同时调度新传TB和调度重传TB，所述下行控制信息包括第一字段，所述第一字段包括(N+2)个比特b 0，b 1，…，b N+1；
所述第一字段中j个连续比特b k，b k+1，…，b k+j-1中，只有1个比特的状态为1，其它的j-1个比特的状态都为0，所述j是正整数，且所述j＝N+1-L，所述k是预先规定的整数，所述k＝0，或所述k＝L+1；
所述k＝0，且所述第一字段中b j比特的比特状态为1，且所述第一字段中L个连续比特b j+1，b j+2，…，b N+1携带所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的NDI信息；
或者，所述k＝L+1，且所述第一字段中b L比特的比特状态为1，且所述第一字段中L个连续比特b 0，b 1，…，b L-1携带所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的NDI信息；
所述网络设备根据所述下行控制信息发送所述L个TB，或者接收所述L个TB。
10、根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述网络设备根据第一字段的比特状态与L、L个TB中第一TB的HARQ进程号及L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息之间的对应关系确定所述第一字段中的一个或多个比特状态，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的一个TB。
11、根据权利要求9或10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述k＝0，所述网络设备确定第一TB的HARQ进程号是i，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的第一个TB，0B第一个备确定所述网络设备以b 0比特作为起始比特，所述网络设备确定所述第一字段中b i比特的比特状态为1，以及所述b 0，b 1，…，b j-1中除b i比特外其他的j-1个比特的比特状态都为0；或者，
所述k＝L+1，所述网络设备确定第一TB的HARQ进程号是i-L-1，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的第一个TB，L+1一个备确定第一所述网络设备以b L+1比特作为起始比特，所述网络设备确定所述第一字段中b i比特的比特状态为1，所述网络设备确定所述b L+1， b L+2，…，b N+1中除b i比特外其他的j-1个比特的比特状态都为0。
12、根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述k＝0，所述网络设备确定所述第一字段中b N+1-L比特的比特状态为1；或者，
所述k＝L+1，所述网络设备确定所述第一字段中b L比特的比特状态为1。
13、根据权利要求9、11或12所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述网络设备用L个比特按照位图方式指示所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息，所述L个比特是所述第一字段中的b j+1，b j+2，…，b N+1；或者，
所述网络设备用L个比特按照位图方式指示所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息，所述L个比特是所述第一字段中的b 0，b 1，…，b L-1。
14、根据权利要求9至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述网络设备确定所述下行控制信息能够同时调度新传TB和重传TB时，所述网络设备确定所述下行控制信息包括所述第一字段，且所述网络设备设置所述下行控制信息中的第一比特的比特状态为1，其中，所述第一比特是1个比特。
15、根据权利要求9至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述网络设备确定所述下行控制信息能够调度的TB只能是全部新传TB时，或所述网络设备确定所述下行控制信息能够调度的TB只能是全部重传TB时，所述网络设备确定所述下行控制信息不包括所述第一字段；或者，
所述网络设备确定所述下行控制信息包括第二字段和/或第三字段时，所述网络设备确定所述下行控制信息不包括所述第一字段；
所述网络设备设置所述下行控制信息中的第一比特的比特状态为0，其中所述第一比特是1个比特。
16、根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述下行控制信息调度多个新传TB时，或所述下行控制信息调度多个重传TB时，所述网络设备设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为1；或者，
所述下行控制信息包括第二字段和/或第三字段时，所述网络设备设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为1；
所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB或者2个TB时，所述网络设备设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为0；
其中，所述第二比特是1个比特。
17、根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
所述下行控制信息调度多个新传TB时，或所述下行控制信息调度多个重传TB时，所述网络设备设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为1，其中，所述第二比特是1个比特；或者，
所述下行控制信息包括第二字段和或第三字段时，所述网络设备设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为1，其中，所述第二比特是1个比特；
所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB或2个TB时，所述网络设备确定所述下行控制信息还包括第三比特，所述第三比特是1个比特，所述网络设备设置所述第三比特的比特状态为0。
18、一种终端设备，其特征在于，所述终端设备包括：处理模块和收发模块，其中，
所述收发模块，用于从网络设备接收下行控制信息，其中，所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个传输块TB，所述N是正整数；
所述处理模块，用于确定所述下行控制信息包括第一字段时，所述第一字段包括(N+2)个比特b 0，b 1，…，b N+1；
根据所述第一字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，其中，所述L是正整数，且1正整数，；
所述L大于1时，所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB中能够既有新传TB也有重传TB；
所述第一字段中j个连续比特b k，b k+1，…，b k+j-1中，只有1个比特的比特状态为1，其它的j-1个比特的比特状态都为0，所述j是正整数，且所述j＝N+1-L，所述k是预先规定的整数，所述k＝0，或所述k＝L+1；
所述k＝0，所述第一字段中b j比特的比特状态为1，且所述第一字段中L个连续比特b j+1，b j+2，…，b N+1携带所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的新数据指示NDI信息；
或者，所述k＝L+1，所述第一字段中b L比特的比特状态为1，且所述第一字段中L个连续比特b 0，b 1，…，b L-1携带所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的NDI信息；
所述处理模块，用于确定所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ进程号；
所述收发模块，用于根据确定的所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ进程号，和所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息，发送所述L个TB，或者接收所述L个TB。
19、根据权利要求18所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述L、所述L个TB中第一TB的HARQ进程号及所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息是根据第一字段的比特状态与TB个数、第一TB的HARQ进程号、L个TB的NDI信息之间的对应关系确定的，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的一个TB。
20、根据权利要求18所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于以b 0比特作为起始比特，确定b i比特是所述(N+2)个比特中第一个比特状态为1的比特，第一TB的HARQ进程号是i，根据所述第一TB的HARQ进程号以及L个HARQ进程的进程号之间的第一关联关系确定所述L个TB中除所述第一TB以外的其它TB的HARQ进程号，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的一个TB，所述L个HARQ进程是所述L个TB对应的HARQ进程；或者，以b L+1比特作为起始比特，确定b i比特是所述(N+2)个比特中第一个比特状态为1的比特，第一TB的HARQ进程号是i-L-1，根据所述第一TB的HARQ进程号以及L个HARQ进程的进程号之间的第一关联关系确定所述L个TB中除所述第一TB以外的其它TB的HARQ进程号，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的一个TB，所述L个HARQ进程是所述L个TB对应的HARQ进程。
21、根据权利要求18所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于以b 0比特作为起始比特，确定b m比特为所述(N+2)个比特中第二个比特状态为1的比特，所述j＝m，所述L＝N+1-m；或者，
所述处理模块，用于以b N+1比特作为起始比特，确定b m比特是所述(N+2)个比特中从右往左第二个比特状态为1的比特，所述j＝N+1-m，所述L＝m。
22、根据权利要求18、20或21所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息是根据L个比特b j+1，b j+2，…，b N+1按照位图方式确定的；或者，
所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息是根据L个比特b 0，b 1，…，b L-1按照位图方式确定的。
23、根据权利要求18至22中任一项所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于根据所述下行控制信息中的第一比特，确定所述下行控制信息是否包括所述第一字段，其中，所述第一比特是1个比特；所述第一比特的比特状态为1，确定所述下行控制信息包括所述第一字段，且所述N是大于1的正整数。
24、根据权利要求18至22中任一项所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于根据所述下行控制信息中的第一比特，确定所述下行控制信息是否包括所述第一字段，其中，所述第一比特是1个比特；所述第一比特的比特状态为0，确定所述下行控制信息不包括所述第一字段；
确定所述下行控制信息包括第二比特，其中，所述第二比特是1个比特；
所述第二比特的比特状态为1，确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度的所有TB都是新传TB，或者所述下行控制信息调度的所有TB都是重传TB；或者，
所述第二比特的比特状态为1，确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度包括第二字段和/或第三字段，所述第二字段用于指示所述最多N个TB的HARQ process number和/或第一标识信息，所述第三字段用于指示第二标识信息；或者，
所述第二比特的比特状态为0，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB或2个TB，且所述下行控制信息包括第四字段和/或第五字段，所述第四字段用于指示HARQ process number和/或NDI信息，所述第五字段用于指示冗余版本(Redundancy Version，RV)；
或者，所述第二比特的比特状态为0，确定所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB或者2个TB。
25、根据权利要求18至22中任一项所述的终端设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于根据所述下行控制信息中的第一比特，确定所述下行控制信息是否包括所述第一字段，其中所述第一比特是1个比特；所述第一比特的比特状态为0，确定所述下行控制信息不包括所述第一字段；确定所述下行控制信息包括第二比特，其中所述第二比特是1个比特；所述第二比特的比特状态为1，确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度的所有TB都是新传TB，或者所述下行控制信息调度的所有TB都是重传TB；或者，所述第二比特的比特状态为0，确定所述下行控制信息还包括第三比特，所述第三比特是1个比特，且所述第三比特的比特状态固定为1；根据所述第三比特确定所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB。
26、一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：处理模块和收发模块，其中，
所述处理模块，用于确定下行控制信息调度的传输块TB个数L，其中，所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，所述N是正整数，所述L是正整数，且1正整数，；
所述处理模块，用于确定所述L个TB的HARQ进程号；
所述处理模块，用于确定所述L个TB的新数据指示NDI信息；
所述收发模块，用于向终端设备发送所述下行控制信息，所述下行控制信息能够同时调度新传TB和调度重传TB，所述下行控制信息包括第一字段，所述第一字段包括(N+2)个比特b 0，b 1，…，b N+1；
所述第一字段中j个连续比特b k，b k+1，…，b k+j-1中，只有1个比特的状态为1，其它 的j-1个比特的状态都为0，所述j是正整数，且所述j＝N+1-L，所述k是预先规定的整数，所述k＝0，或所述k＝L+1；
所述k＝0，且所述第一字段中b j比特的比特状态为1，且所述第一字段中L个连续比特b j+1，b j+2，…，b N+1携带所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的NDI信息；
或者，所述k＝L+1，且所述第一字段中b L比特的比特状态为1，且所述第一字段中L个连续比特b 0，b 1，…，b L-1携带所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的NDI信息；
所述收发模块，用于根据所述下行控制信息发送所述L个TB，或者接收所述L个TB。
27、根据权利要求26所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于根据第一字段的比特状态与L、L个TB中第一TB的HARQ进程号及L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息之间的对应关系确定所述第一字段中的一个或多个比特状态，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的一个TB。
28、根据权利要求26或27所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于所述k＝0，确定第一TB的HARQ进程号是i，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的第一个TB，0B第一个设备，以b 0比特作为起始比特，确定所述第一字段中b i比特的比特状态为1，以及所述b 0，b 1，…，b j-1中除b i比特外其他的j-1个比特的比特状态都为0；或者，所述k＝L+1，确定第一TB的HARQ进程号是i-L-1，所述第一TB是所述L个TB中的第一个TB，L+1一个，状态都为以b L+1比特作为起始比特，确定所述第一字段中b i比特的比特状态为1，确定所述b L+1，b L+2，…，b N+1中除b i比特外其他的j-1个比特的比特状态都为0。
29、根据权利要求26所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于所述k＝0，确定所述第一字段中b N+1-L比特的比特状态为1；或者，所述k＝L+1，确定所述第一字段中b L比特的比特状态为1。
30、根据权利要求26、28或29所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于用L个比特按照位图方式指示所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息，所述L个比特是所述第一字段中的b j+1，b j+2，…，b N+1；或者，用L个比特按照位图方式指示所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息，所述L个比特是所述第一字段中的b 0，b 1，…，b L-1。
31、根据权利要求26至30中任一项所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于确定所述下行控制信息能够同时调度新传TB和重传TB时，确定所述下行控制信息包括所述第一字段，且设置所述下行控制信息中的第一比特的比特状态为1，其中，所述第一比特是1个比特。
32、根据权利要求26至30中任一项所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于确定所述下行控制信息能够调度的TB只能是全部新传TB时，或确定所述下行控制信息能够调度的TB只能是全部重传TB，或者确定所述下行控制信息包括第二字段和/或第三字段时，确定所述下行控制信息不包括所述第一字段；设置所述下行控制信息中的第一比特的比特状态为0，其中所述第一比特是1个比特。
33、根据权利要求32所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于所述下行控制信息调度多个新传TB时，或所述下行控制信息调度多个重传TB或者确定所述下行控制信息包括第二字段和/或第三字段时，设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为1；所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB或2个TB时，设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为0；其中，所述第二比特是1个比特。
34、根据权利要求32所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于所述下行控制 信息调度多个新传TB时，或所述下行控制信息调度多个重传TB，或者确定所述下行控制信息包括第二字段和/或第三字段时，设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为1，其中，所述第二比特是1个比特；所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB或2个TB时，确定所述下行控制信息还包括第三比特，所述第三比特是1个比特，设置所述第三比特的比特状态为0。
33、根据权利要求32所述的网络设备，其特征在于，所述处理模块，用于所述下行控制信息调度多个新传TB时，或所述下行控制信息调度多个重传TB时，设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为1；所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB时，设置所述下行控制信息中的第二比特的比特状态为0；其中，所述第二比特是1个比特。
34、根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，
所述第二比特的比特状态为1，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度包括第二字段和/或第三字段，所述第二字段用于指示所述最多N个TB的HARQ process number和/或第一标识信息，所述第三字段用于指示第二标识信息，所述方法还包括：
所述终端设备根据所述第二字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，其中，所述L是正整数，且1正整数，；
所述终端设备根据所述第二字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的HARQ process number；
所述第二字段包括8个或者9个比特，所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ process number是根据第二字段按照比特位图方式确定的；
所述终端设备根据所述第一标识或者第二标识确定所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息；
所述终端设备根据确定的所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ进程号，和所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息，发送所述L个TB，或者接收所述L个TB。
35、根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，
所述第三字段包括1个比特。
36、根据权利要求34所述的方法，其特征在于，
所述L个TB的NDI是相同的；
或者所述L个TB的前一个NDI是相同的。
37、根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，
所述第二比特的比特状态为0，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息只能调度1个TB或2个TB，且所述下行控制信息包括第四字段和/或第五字段，所述第四字段用于指示HARQ process number和/或NDI信息，所述第五字段用于指示冗余版本(Redundancy Version，RV)，所述方法还包括：
所述终端设备根据所述第四字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，其中，所述L是正整数，且1正整数；
所述终端设备根据所述第四字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的HARQ process number；
所述终端设备根据所述第四字段确定所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息；
所述终端设备根据确定的所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ进程号，和所述L个TB 中每个TB的NDI信息，发送所述L个TB，或者接收所述L个TB。
38、根据权利要求7或37所述的方法，其特征在于，
所述终端设备根据所述第五字段和/或所述第四字段确定冗余版本信息。
39、根据权利要求7，38或37所述的方法，其特征在于，
所述第四字段包括7个比特或者所述第四字段包括9个比特；和/或，
所述第五字段包括2个比特。
40、根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，
所述第二比特的比特状态为1，所述终端设备确定所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，其中所述N是大于1的正整数，且所述下行控制信息调度包括第二字段和/或第三字段，所述第二字段用于指示所述最多N个TB的HARQ process number和/或第一标识信息，所述第三字段用于指示第二标识信息，所述方法还包括：
所述终端设备根据所述第二字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，其中，所述L是正整数，且1正整数，；
所述终端设备根据所述第二字段确定所述下行控制信息调度的L个TB的HARQ process number；
所述第二字段包括8个或者9个比特，所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ process number是根据第二字段按照比特位图方式确定的；
所述终端设备根据所述第一标识或者第二标识确定所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息；
所述终端设备根据确定的所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ进程号，和所述L个TB中每个TB的NDI信息，发送所述L个TB，或者接收所述L个TB。
一种实施方式中，网络设备可以根据下图来确定一个或多个TB的调度信息，调度信息包括以下信息的一种或多种：HARQ process number，NDI(new data indicator)信息，RV。网络设备根据确定的调度信息，通过下行控制信息发送该调度信息。
终端设备接收网络设备发送的下行控制信息，并可以根据表5确定或解析调度信息。终端设备根据确定的调度信息接收或发送数据。表5中，b0至b9表示10个比特或10个比特的编号，N(i)表示第i个TB的NDI信息，H(i)表示第i个HARQ process关联的TB是否被调度，如H(i)＝1表示第i个HARQ process被调度，H(i)＝0表示第i个HARQ process没有被调度，HARQ process被调度也可以理解为该HARQ process number对应的TB是否被调度。
表5
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000010
下行控制信息调度的传输块TB个数L，还可以是下行控制信息指示的混合自动重发请求HARQ进程数L，即TB个数和KARQ进程数是一一对应的。
需要说明的是，NDI信息可以指示下行控制信息调度的数据传输携带的是新传TB还是重传TB，例如NDI信息可以包括L个TB中每个TB的反馈信息，其中TB的反馈信息也可以称为TB的应答信息。
基站确定DCI调度的TB个数，确定调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，每个TB的NDI，RV中的一种或多种。若基站确定按照第一方式指示调度信息，则第一比特置为1，此时包括第一字段，第一字段包括10个比特。可选的，第一方式为调度的多个HARQ process为连续的，和/或通过第一字段(或第一字段的部分比特)按照比特位图的方式指示NDI信息。
或者，
基站确定按照第二方式指示调度信息，则第一比特为0，且第二比特为1。可选的，此时所述下行控制信息调度包括第二字段和/或第三字段，所述第二字段用于指示所述最多N个TB的HARQ process number和/或第一标识信息，所述第三字段用于指示第二标识信息，第二标识或第一标识用于指示新传或重传信息，或者第二标识或第一标识用于指示NDI信息。所述第二字段包括8个或者9个比特，所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ process number是根据第二字段按照比特位图方式确定的。
或者，
若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数为1个或2个，则第一比特为0，且第二比特为0。所述下行控制信息包括第四字段和/或第五字段，所述第四字段用于指示HARQ process number和/或NDI信息，所述第五字段用于指示冗余版本(Redundancy Version，RV)。
用户设备接收基站发送的下行控制信息DCI。用户设备根据DCI确定调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，每个TB的NDI，RV中的一种或多种。若第一比特为1，则确定按照第一方式确定调度信息。若基站确定按照第一方式指示调度信息，则第一比特置为1，此时包括第一字段，第一字段包括10个比特。可选的，第一方式为调度的多个HARQ process为连续的，和/或通过第一字段(或第一字段的部分比特)按照比特位图的方式指示NDI信息。
或者，
用户设备根据第一比特为0且第二比特为1确定按照第二方式确定调度信息。可选的，此时所述下行控制信息调度包括第二字段和/或第三字段，所述第二字段用于指示所述最多N个TB的HARQ process number和/或第一标识信息，所述第三字段用于指示第二标识信息，第二标识或第一标识用于指示新传或重传信息，或者第二标识或第一标识用于指示NDI信息。所述第二字段包括8个或者9个比特，所述L个TB中每个TB的HARQ process  number是根据第二字段按照比特位图方式确定的。
或者，
用户设备根据第一比特为0，且第二比特为0，确定DCI调度的TB个数为1个或2个。所述下行控制信息包括第四字段和/或第五字段，所述第四字段用于指示HARQ process number和/或NDI信息，所述第五字段用于指示冗余版本(Redundancy Version，RV)。
第二设备接收来自第一设备的第一信息，例如该第一信息为下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)。该第一信息中包含第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示调度的TB个数为第一集或者第二集合，所述第一集合与所述第二集合是不同的(至少有一个TB个数属于第二集合但不属于第一集合)，或者所述第一指示信息和/或所述第二指示信息用于指示调度多个TB的方式。
一种示例性的说明中，第一集合包括的TB数为1和2，即此时第一信息指示调度的TB数为1或者2。第二集合包括的TB数为{1，2，3，4，5，6，7，8}，或者第二集合包括的TB数为{3，4，5，6，7，8}。
一种示例性的说明中，第一指示信息包括第一字段，第一字段的x比特用于指示第一指示信息，例如，x＝1，第一字段的第一状态(如1)用于指示调度的TB数属于第一集合，第一字段的第二状态(如0)用于指示调度的TB数属于第二集合；或者x＝2，第一字段的第一状态(如00)用于指示调度的TB数属于第一集合，第一字段的第二状态(如01)用于指示调度的TB数属于第二集合。
一种示例性的说明中，第一指示信息包括一个或多个字段。第一指示信息的x比特用于指示调度的TB数属于第一集合或者按照第一调度方式进行一个或多个TB的调度。例如该第一方式为调度的一个或多个TB为全部新传或者为全部重传。例如该第一方式为调度的多个TB所关联的HARQ process是连续或者不连续的，即此时通过第二字段通过比特位图的方式来指示HARQ process number。
一种示例性的说明中，第一信息中包括第一指示信息和第二指示信息，第一指示信息包括一个或多个字段，第二指示信息包括一个或多个字段。第一指示信息的x比特用于指示按照第二调度方式对一个或多个TB进行调度，调度的TB数属于第一集合或者按照第一调度方式或者第二方式进行一个或多个TB的调度。例如该第一方式为调度的一个或多个TB为全部新传，或者为全部重传。例如该第一方式为调度的多个TB所关联的HARQ process是连续或者不连续的，即此时通过第二字段通过比特位图的方式来指示HARQ process number。例如该第二方式为调度的多个TB所关联的HARQ process是连续的。
上述HARQ process是连续的也可以理解为根据第一个HARQ process number和调度的TB个数确定调度的一个或多个TB的HARQ process number。
通过本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法可以有效的节省信令开销。
本申请提供的又一种通信方法。该方法可以应用于图1所示通信系统中的终端设备，该方法包括：
每个TB的HARQ取值范围是0～7。每个TB的NDI有2种取值。DCI调度一个TB时，有8(HARQ process ID取值个数)*2(NDI取值可能性)＝16种组合。DCI调度两个TB时，有28(2个TB的HARQ process ID组合数)*4(2个TB的NDI的取值可能性)＝112种组合。因此，一个TB和2个TB的调度共有16+112＝128种组合。因此DCI中有7比特指示DCI调度的一个传输块TB的HARQ process ID和NDI，或指示DCI调度的2个TB每 个TB的HARQ process ID和NDI。DCI调度1个TB时，该TB的HARQ process ID取值是0～7，并且DCI中需要指示该TB的新数据指示。DCI调度2个TB时，其中一个TB(也可以称为第一个TB)的HARQ process ID取值是0～7，另外一个TB(也可以称为第二个TB)的HARQ process ID取值是0～7，但第一个TB的HARQ process ID和第二个TB的HARQ process ID不同。DCI中需要分别指示两个TB的各自的NDI。
所述DCI的7个比特中有一个比特是第一TB的NDI。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的N个TB中的一个TB。N＝1或N＝2。所述DCI的7个比特中有3个比特在{0～7}中指示HARQ process ID 1，所述DCI的7个比特中的另外3个比特在{0～7}中指示HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值可以和HARQ process ID 2的值相同。HARQ process ID 1的值也可以和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同。其中一个TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 1，另外一个TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 2。
HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值相同，则表示DCI调度了一个TB，且该TB的HARQ process ID＝HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值不同，则表示DCI调度了两个TB。
HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI＝0。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI＝1。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的第一个TB。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的第二个TB的NDI＝0。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的第二个TB的NDI＝1。例如，调度的2个TB中，其中一个TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 1，另外一个TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 2。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的第二TB的NDI＝0。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的第二TB的NDI＝1。
或者，HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI＝0。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI＝1。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的第一个TB。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的第二个TB的NDI＝0。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的第二个TB的NDI＝1。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的第二TB的NDI＝0。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的第二TB的NDI＝1。
基站确定DCI调度的TB个数，确定调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，确定调度的每个TB的NDI。若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数＝1，则基站用DCI中的1个比特指示该TB的NDI，基站用DCI中的3个比特在{0～7}范围中指示HARQ process ID 1，基站用DCI 中的3个比特在{0～7}范围中指示HARQ process ID 2，且HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。
若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数＝2，则基站用DCI中的1个比特指示第一TB的NDI，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。基站用DCI中的3个比特在{0～7}范围中指示HARQ process ID 1，基站用DCI中的3个比特在{0～7}范围中指示HARQ process ID 2，且HARQ process ID 1不等于HARQ process ID 2。基站确定第二TB的NDI＝0，则HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值。基站确定第二TB的NDI＝1，则HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值。或者，基站确定第二TB的NDI＝0，则HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值。基站确定第二TB的NDI＝1，则HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值。
用户设备接收基站发送的下行控制信息DCI。所述DCI中的7个比特指示DCI调度的TB个数，确定DCI调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，确定DCI调度的每个TB的NDI。DCI的7个比特中有一个比特是第一TB的NDI。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的N个TB中的一个TB。N＝1或N＝2。所述DCI的7个比特中有3个比特在{0～7}中指示HARQ process ID 1，所述DCI的7个比特中的另外3个比特在{0～7}中指示HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值可以和HARQ process ID 2的值相同。HARQ process ID 1的值也可以和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同。
HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值相同，则用户设备确定DCI调度了一个TB，且该TB的HARQ process ID＝HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。若HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同，则用户设备确定DCI调度了两个TB。第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。
HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB的NDI＝0。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB的NDI＝1。
或者，HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB的NDI＝0。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB的NDI＝1。
表6示出了DCI中的7个比特。
表6
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000011
当调度的TB数为1或者2个时，可以按照如表7所示方式指示NDI，HARQ process ID(HARQ process number)。
表7
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000012
其中，表7中，Single TB:HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2，Two TBs:HARQ process ID 1≠HARQ process ID 2，NDI＝0for 2nd TB if HARQ process ID 1<HARQ process ID 2，NDI＝1for 2nd TB if HARQ process ID 1>HARQ process ID 2。
通过本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法可以有效的节省信令开销。
本申请还提供一种通信方法。该方法可以应用于图1所示通信系统中的终端设备，该方法包括：
每个传输块(transmission block，TB)的HARQ取值范围是0～N-1。每个TB的新数据指示(new data indicator，NDI)有2种取值。下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)调度一个TB时，有N(HARQ process ID取值个数)*2(NDI取值可能性)＝2N种组合。DCI调度2个TB时，有
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000013
(2个TB的HARQ process ID组合数，从N个里面选择2个HARQ process)*4(2个TB的NDI的取值可能性)＝
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000014
种组合。因此，一个TB和2个TB的调度共有
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000015
种组合。因此DCI中需要
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000016
个比特。或者一个TB和2个TB的调度共用M2＝2+2*log2(N)个比特。
可选的，DCI中的log2(N)个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1(也可以称为第一TB对应的HARQprocess)，DCI中的另外log2(N)个比特用于指示HARQ process ID2(也可以称为除第一TB以外的另外一个TB，当调度两个TB的时候)。当HARQ process ID1等于HARQ process ID2，则表示调度了一个TB；当HARQ process ID1不等于HARQ process ID2，则表示调度了2个TB。此处HARQ process ID1等于HARQ process ID2，是指用于指示他们的比特取值或状态相同，HARQ process ID1不等于HARQ process ID2，是指用于指示他们的比特取值或状态不相同。
可选的，DCI中的1个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1所对应的NDI。DCI中的另外一个比特用于指示HARQ process ID2所对应的NDI。可选的，当调度的TB数为1时，用于指示HARQ process ID2所对应的NDI的另外一个比特忽略或不存在或与指示HARQ process ID1所对应的NDI的比特取值相同。
例如当N＝8时，3个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1，另外3个比特用于指示HARQ process ID2，1个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1对应的NDI，另外1比特用于指示HARQ process ID2对应的NDI。
可选的，DCI中的1个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1所对应的NDI。HARQ process ID1不等于HARQ process ID2，即调度了2个TB时，当HARQ process ID1的取值大于HARQ process ID2时，则表示HARQ process ID2对应的NDI取值与HARQ process ID1所对应的NDI相同；当HARQ process ID1的取值小于HARQ process ID2时，则表示HARQ  process ID2对应的NDI取值与HARQ process ID1所对应的NDI不相同。
可选的，DCI中的1个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1所对应的NDI。HARQ process ID1不等于HARQ process ID2，即调度了2个TB时，当HARQ process ID1的取值大于HARQ process ID2时，则表示HARQ process ID2对应的NDI取值与HARQ process ID1所对应的NDI不相同；当HARQ process ID1的取值小于HARQ process ID2时，则表示HARQ process ID2对应的NDI取值与HARQ process ID1所对应的NDI相同。
基站确定DCI调度的TB个数，确定调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，确定调度的每个TB的NDI。若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数＝1，则基站用DCI中的1个比特指示该TB的NDI，基站用DCI中的log2(N)个比特在{0～N-1}范围中指示HARQ process ID 1，基站用DCI中的log2(N)个比特在{0～N-1}范围中指示HARQ process ID 2，且HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。
若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数＝2，则基站用DCI中的1个比特指示第一TB的NDI，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。基站用DCI中的log2(N)个比特在{0～N-1}范围中指示HARQ process ID 1，基站用DCI中的log2(N)个比特在{0～N-1}范围中指示HARQ process ID 2，且HARQ process ID 1不等于HARQ process ID 2。基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值；基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值。或者，基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值；基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值。
用户设备接收基站发送的下行控制信息DCI。所述DCI中的M1个比特指示DCI调度的TB个数，确定DCI调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，确定DCI调度的每个TB的NDI。DCI的M1个比特中有一个比特是第一TB的NDI。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的Q个TB中的一个TB。Q＝1或Q＝2。所述DCI的M1个比特中有log2(N)个比特在{0～N-1}中指示HARQ process ID 1，所述DCI的M1个比特中的另外log2(N)个比特在{0～N-1}中指示HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值可以和HARQ process ID 2的值相同。HARQ process ID 1的值也可以和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同。
HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值相同，则用户设备确定DCI调度了一个TB，且该TB的HARQ process ID＝HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。若HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同，则用户设备确定DCI调度了两个TB。第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。
可选的，所述DCI的M2个比特中有1个比特指示第一TB(或者HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI，所述终端设备根据该比特确定第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备根据DCI的M2个比特中的另外一个比特确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)对应的NDI。
可选的，所述DCI的M1个比特中有1个比特指示第一TB(或者HARQ process ID 1) 对应的NDI，所述终端设备根据该比特确定第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)对应的NDI与第一TB对应的NDI相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)的NDI与第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI不相同。
或者，HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)对应的NDI与第一TB对应的NDI不相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)的NDI与第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI相同。
例如，因此当N＝8时，DCI中有M1＝7比特指示DCI调度的一个传输块TB的HARQ process ID和NDI，或指示DCI调度的2个TB每个TB的HARQ process ID和NDI。DCI调度1个TB时，该TB的HARQ process ID取值是0～7，并且DCI中需要指示该TB的新数据指示。DCI调度2个TB时，其中一个TB(也可以称为第一个TB)的HARQ process ID取值是0～7，另外一个TB(也可以称为第二个TB)的HARQ process ID取值是除前一个TB的HARQ process之外的0～7中的一个，第一个TB的HARQ process ID和第二个TB的HARQ process ID不同。DCI中需要分别指示两个TB的各自的NDI。
所述DCI的7个比特中有一个比特是第一TB的NDI。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的Q个TB中的一个TB。Q＝1或Q＝2。所述DCI的7个比特中有3个比特在{0～7}中指示HARQ process ID 1，所述DCI的7个比特中的另外3个比特在{0～7}中指示HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值可以和HARQ process ID 2的值相同。HARQ process ID 1的值也可以和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同。其中一个TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 1，另外一个TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 2。
HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值相同，则表示DCI调度了一个TB，且该TB的HARQ process ID＝HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值不同，则表示DCI调度了两个TB。
DCI中其中1个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1或第一TB对应的NDI。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，或HARQ process ID2的NDI与HARQ process ID1的NDI相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，或者HARQ process ID2的NDI与HARQ process ID1的NDI不相同。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的第一个TB。
或者，DCI中其中1个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1或第一TB对应的NDI。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，或HARQ process ID2的NDI与HARQ process ID1的NDI不相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，或者HARQ process ID2的NDI与HARQ process ID1的NDI相同。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的第一个TB。
基站确定DCI调度的TB个数，确定调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，确定调度的 每个TB的NDI。若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数＝1，则基站用DCI中的1个比特指示该TB的NDI，基站用DCI中的3个比特在{0～7}范围中指示HARQ process ID 1，基站用DCI中的3个比特在{0～7}范围中指示HARQ process ID 2，且HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。
若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数＝2，则基站用DCI中的1个比特指示第一TB的NDI，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。基站用DCI中的3个比特在{0～7}范围中指示HARQ process ID 1，基站用DCI中的3个比特在{0～7}范围中指示HARQ process ID 2，且HARQ process ID 1不等于HARQ process ID 2。基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值；基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值。或者，基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值；基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值。
用户设备接收基站发送的下行控制信息DCI。所述DCI中的7个比特指示DCI调度的TB个数，确定DCI调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，确定DCI调度的每个TB的NDI。DCI的7个比特中有一个比特是第一TB的NDI。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的Q个TB中的一个TB。Q＝1或Q＝2。所述DCI的7个比特中有3个比特在{0～7}中指示HARQ process ID 1，所述DCI的7个比特中的另外3个比特在{0～7}中指示HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值可以和HARQ process ID 2的值相同。HARQ process ID 1的值也可以和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同。
HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值相同，则用户设备确定DCI调度了一个TB，且该TB的HARQ process ID＝HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。若HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同，则用户设备确定DCI调度了两个TB。第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。
可选的，所述DCI的7个比特中有1个比特指示第一TB(或者HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI，所述终端设备根据该比特确定第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)对应的NDI与第一TB对应的NDI相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)的NDI与第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI不相同。
或者，HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)对应的NDI与第一TB对应的NDI不相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)的NDI与第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI相同。
例如，因此当N＝4时，DCI中有M1＝5比特指示DCI调度的一个传输块TB的HARQ process ID和NDI，或指示DCI调度的2个TB每个TB的HARQ process ID和NDI。DCI 调度1个TB时，该TB的HARQ process ID取值是0～3，并且DCI中需要指示该TB的新数据指示。DCI调度2个TB时，其中一个TB(也可以称为第一个TB)的HARQ process ID取值是0～3，另外一个TB(也可以称为第二个TB)的HARQ process ID取值是除前一个TB的HARQ process之外的0～3中的一个，第一个TB的HARQ process ID和第二个TB的HARQ process ID不同。DCI中需要分别指示两个TB的各自的NDI。
所述DCI的5个比特中有一个比特是第一TB的NDI。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的Q个TB中的一个TB。Q＝1或Q＝2。所述DCI的5个比特中有2个比特在{0～3}中指示HARQ process ID 1，所述DCI的5个比特中的另外2个比特在{0～3}中指示HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值可以和HARQ process ID 2的值相同。HARQ process ID 1的值也可以和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同。其中一个TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 1，另外一个TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID 2。
HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值相同，则表示DCI调度了一个TB，且该TB的HARQ process ID＝HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值不同，则表示DCI调度了两个TB。
DCI中其中1个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1或第一TB对应的NDI。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，或HARQ process ID2的NDI与HARQ process ID1的NDI相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，或者HARQ process ID2的NDI与HARQ process ID1的NDI不相同。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的第一个TB。
或者，DCI中其中1个比特用于指示HARQ process ID1或第一TB对应的NDI。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，或HARQ process ID2的NDI与HARQ process ID1的NDI不相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则表示DCI调度的2个TB中除第一TB外的另一个TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，或者HARQ process ID2的NDI与HARQ process ID1的NDI相同。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的第一个TB。
基站确定DCI调度的TB个数，确定调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，确定调度的每个TB的NDI。若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数＝1，则基站用DCI中的1个比特指示该TB的NDI，基站用DCI中的2个比特在{0～3}范围中指示HARQ process ID 1，基站用DCI中的2个比特在{0～3}范围中指示HARQ process ID 2，且HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。
若基站确定DCI调度的TB个数＝2，则基站用DCI中的1个比特指示第一TB的NDI，第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。基站用DCI中的2个比特在{0～3}范围中指示HARQ process ID 1，基站用DCI中的2个比特在{0～3}范围中指示HARQ process ID 2，且HARQ process ID 1不等于HARQ process ID 2。基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值；基站确定第二TB的 NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值。或者，基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值；基站确定第二TB的NDI与第一TB的NDI不相同，则HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值。
用户设备接收基站发送的下行控制信息DCI。所述DCI中的5个比特指示DCI调度的TB个数，确定DCI调度的每个TB的HARQ process ID，确定DCI调度的每个TB的NDI。DCI的5个比特中有一个比特是第一TB的NDI。例如，第一TB是DCI调度的Q个TB中的一个TB。Q＝1或Q＝2。所述DCI的5个比特中有2个比特在{0～3}中指示HARQ process ID 1，所述DCI的5个比特中的另外2个比特在{0～3}中指示HARQ process ID 2。HARQ process ID 1的值可以和HARQ process ID 2的值相同。HARQ process ID 1的值也可以和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同。
HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值相同，则用户设备确定DCI调度了一个TB，且该TB的HARQ process ID＝HARQ process ID 1＝HARQ process ID 2。若HARQ process ID 1的值和HARQ process ID 2的值不相同，则用户设备确定DCI调度了两个TB。第一TB是DCI调度的2个TB中的一个TB，第二TB为调度的2个TB中的除第一TB外的另外一个TB。第一TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID1，第二TB的HARQ process number为HARQ process ID2。
可选的，所述DCI的5个比特中有1个比特指示第一TB(或者HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI，所述终端设备根据该比特确定第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI。HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)对应的NDI与第一TB对应的NDI相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)的NDI与第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI不相同。
或者，HARQ process ID 1的值小于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)对应的NDI与第一TB对应的NDI不相同。HARQ process ID 1的值大于HARQ process ID 2的值，则用户设备确定DCI调度第二TB(也就是HARQ process ID2)的NDI与第一TB(或HARQ process ID 1)对应的NDI相同。
以上实施方式，如果不冲突可以互相结合。
以上实施方式中NDI取值相同或不同相同与NDI相同或不相同的含义是一样的。
通过本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法可以有效的节省信令开销。
增强型机器类通信(enhanced Machine Type Communication，eMTC)系统及其他演化系统(Further eMTC，FeMTC；Even Further eMTC，eFeMTC；additional MTC，AMTC)是在LTE基础上衍生的系统。Release 14和之前版本的标准中已经实现(工作在Inband模式)，且实际上也已开始部署。MTC UE的电池寿命通常预期在10年或更长。而目前NR(new radio)即将商用，NR与LTE(Long Term Evolution)共存将成为一个重要场景，并且在未来的频谱部署中更可能的情况是NR逐渐替代LTE系统。考虑到已经部署的MTC UE还有较长的电池寿命，MTC系统与NR系统很可能将同时出现，因此MTC系统工作于NR频段上、如何避免MTC系统与NR系统之间的干扰是一个需要考虑的重要问题。在下行中，由于LTE系统中包括中心直流子载波且不计算在资源块(Resource block，RB)中，而NR不包括中心直流子载波，同时由于LTE的信道栅格和NR的信道栅格可能是不 对齐的，LTE和NR的RB是不对齐的。为了减小NR侧减小预留资源，现有技术中将LTE相对于NR不对齐的子载波进行打孔(puncture)。但是现有技术中还没有解决的问题是在哪些频率资源的边缘进行打孔。
基于此，本申请提供一种通信方法。该方法可以应用于图1所示通信系统中的终端设备，该方法包括：
一种可实施的方式中，终端设备接收第一信息，该第一信息用于指示对第一资源打孔的位置和子载波数目，该第一资源包括N个RB或M个窄带，该N为大于或等于1的整数，M为大于或等于1的整数。例如N＝1，或者M＝1。
可选的，网络设备发送第一信息，该第一信息用于指示对第一资源打孔的位置和子载波数目，该第一资源包括N个RB或M个窄带，该N为大于或等于1的整数，M为大于或等于1的整数。例如N＝1，或者M＝1。
可选的，M或N个窄带是网络设备配置的，即网络设备发送第二信息，该第二信息用于指示M或N，终端设备接收第二信息，终端设备根据第二信息确定M或根据第二信息确定N。
可选的，终端设备接收网络设备发送的第三信息，第三信息用于指示第一资源是N个RB或者是M个窄带。终端设备根据第三信息确定第一资源包括N个RB或M个窄带。即此时第三信息指示的是第一资源的颗粒度，该颗粒度可以为窄带也可以为RB。
可选的，N或者M为预定义的或者根据系统带宽确定的。例如系统带宽为1.4MHz或系统带宽为6个RB时，N＝6或者M＝1。
例如系统带宽为3MHz或为15个RB时，N＝6或者M＝1。可选的，终端设备根据第一信息确定当系统带宽为3MHz时的1个窄带是编号为0的窄带还是编号为1的窄带。可选的，网络设备发送第四信息，终端设备接收第四信息，该第四信息用于指示M个窄带位置；当系统带宽为3MHz时的第四信息用于指示1个窄带是编号为0的窄带还是编号为1的窄带，此时用户设备根据第四信息确定当系统带宽为3MHz时的1个窄带是编号为0的窄带还是编号为1的窄带。
例如系统带宽为5MHz或为25个RB时，N＝12或者M＝2。可选的，终端设备根据第一信息确定当系统带宽为5MHz时的2个窄带是编号为0和编号为1的窄带还是编号为2和编号为3的窄带。可选的，网络设备发送第四信息，终端设备接收第四信息，该第四信息用于指示M个窄带位置；第四信息用于指示当系统带宽为5MHz时的2个窄带是编号为0和编号为1的窄带还是编号为2和编号为3的窄带，此时用户设备根据第四信息确定当系统带宽为5MHz时的2个窄带是编号为0和编号为1的2个窄带还是编号为2和编号为3的2个窄带。
例如系统带宽为10MHz或为50个RB时，N＝48或者M＝8。可选的，终端设备根据第一信息确定当系统带宽为10MHz时的8个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5，6，7的窄带。可选的，网络设备发送第四信息，终端设备接收第四信息，该第四信息用于指示M个窄带位置；第四信息用于指示当系统带宽为10MHz时的8个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5，6，7的窄带，此时用户设备根据第四信息确定当系统带宽为10MHz时的8个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5，6，7的窄带。
例如系统带宽为15MHz或为75个RB时，N＝36或者M＝6。可选的，终端设备根据第一信息确定当系统带宽为15MHz时的6个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5的窄带还是 编号为6，7，8，9，10，11的窄带。可选的，网络设备发送第四信息，终端设备接收第四信息，该第四信息用于指示M个窄带位置；第四信息用于指示当系统带宽为15MHz时的6个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5的窄带还是编号为6，7，8，9，10，11的窄带。此时用户设备根据第四信息确定当系统带宽为15MHz时的6个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5的窄带还是编号为6，7，8，9，10，11的窄带。
例如系统带宽为20MHz或为100个RB时，N＝96或者M＝16。可选的，终端设备根据第一信息确定当系统带宽为20MHz时的16个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5，6，7，8，9，10，11，12，13，14，15的窄带。可选的，网络设备发送第四信息，终端设备接收第四信息，该第四信息用于指示M个窄带位置；第四信息用于指示当系统带宽为20MHz时的16个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5，6，7，8，9，10，11，12，13，14，15的窄带。此时用户设备根据第四信息确定当系统带宽为20MHz时的16个窄带是编号为0，1，2，3，4，5，6，7，8，9，10，11，12，13，14，15的窄带。
在没有矛盾的情况下，以上各实施方式可以结合。
现有技术中允许一个DCI调度多个传输块(transmission block)。对于覆盖增强模式B的用户，最大调度的TB块个数为4。现有技术中用10个比特来指示NDI，HARQ process number，调度的TB数以及MCS。但是如何简单清晰的指示和解析并没有相应的办法。
基于此，本申请提供一种通信方法。该方法可以应用于图1所示通信系统中的终端设备，该方法包括：
1、一种信息处理方法，其特征在于，包括：
终端设备从网络设备接收下行控制信息，其中，所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个传输块TB，所述N是正整数；所述下行控制信息包括第一比特和第二比特；
所述第一比特包括M个比特，所述第二比特包括P个比特，所述M和P为大于或等于1的整数；
所述终端设备根据所述第二比特确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，所述终端设备根据所述第一比特确定所述L个TB所对应的混合自动重发请求HARQ进程号和所述L个TB的新数据指示NDI信息中的至少一个；所述终端设备根据所述第二比特和/或第一比特确定调制与解调策略MCS；
所述终端设备根据所述调度的TB个数L，所述L个TB所对应的HARQ进程号，L个TB对应的NDI和MCS传输信息。
2、根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备根据所述第二比特确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，包括：
所述终端设备根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L。
3、根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，
所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为0，L＝1或2；和/或
所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为1，L＝3；和/或
所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为2，L＝4。
4、根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
L＝1或2，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外2个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外1个比特用于指示所述第一TB所对应的NDI；
当第一HARQ进程编号等于第二HARQ进程编号时，L＝1；
当第一HARQ进程编号大于第二进程编号时，L＝2，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，所述第二TB对应的NDI为0，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号；
当第一HARQ进程编号小于第二进程编号时，L＝2，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，所述第二TB对应的NDI为1，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号。
5、根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
L＝1或2，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外2个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外1个比特用于指示所述第一TB所对应的NDI；
当第一HARQ进程编号等于第二HARQ进程编号时，L＝1；
当第一HARQ进程编号大于第二进程编号时，L＝2，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，所述第二TB对应的NDI为1，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号；
当第一HARQ进程编号小于第二进程编号时，L＝2，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，所述第二TB对应的NDI为0，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号。
6、根据权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
当L＝3时，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示第三HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外3个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI，所述第三HARQ进程编号为没有被调度的HARQ进程编号；和/或，
当L＝4时，第一比特中的4个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI。
7、根据权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
当L＝3时，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示所述L个TB对应的HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外3个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI；和/或，
当L＝4时，第一比特中的4个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI。
8、根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备根据所述第二比特和/或第一比特确定调制与解调策略MCS，包括：
所述终端设备根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引；或者，
当L＝1，2或3时，所述终端设备根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。
9、根据权利要求1至8任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，当L＝4时，第一比特的一个比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。
10、根据权利要求1至8任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备根据所述第二比特和/或第一比特确定调制与解调策略MCS，包括：
所述终端设备根据所述第一比特中的一个比特确定第一偏移值，第一偏移值为大于或等于0的整数，所述终端设备根据第一偏移值和第二比特对应的第一值V确定MCS的索引。
11、根据权利要求1至10任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，N＝4；和或，
M＝5，P＝5。
12、一种信息处理方法，其特征在于，包括：
网络设备向终端设备发送所述下行控制信息，其中，所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，所述下行控制信息包括第一比特和第二比特；所述第一比特包括M个比特，所述第二比特包括P个比特，所述M和P为大于或等于1的整数；
所述第二比特用于指示所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，所述N和所述L是正整数，且1≤L≤N；所述第一比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的混合自动重发请求HARQ进程号和所述L个TB的新数据指示NDI信息中的至少一个；所述第二比特和/或第一比特用于指示调制与解调策略(Modulation and Coding Scheme，MCS)；
所述网络设备根据所述调度的TB个数L，所述L个TB所对应的HARQ进程号，L个TB对应的NDI和MCS传输信息。
13、根据权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，
第一比特包括一个或多个字段，第二比特包括一个或多个字段。
14、根据权利要求12或13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二比特通过所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值指示所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L。
15、根据权利要求12至14任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，L＝1或2，所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为0；和/或，
L＝3，所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为1；和/或
L＝4，所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为2。
16、根据权利要求12至15任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，L＝1或2，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外2个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外1个比特用于指示所述第一TB所对应的NDI；
当确定L＝1时，第一HARQ进程编号等于第二HARQ进程编号；
当确定L＝2时，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ进程编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，当所述第二TB对应的NDI为0时，第一HARQ进程编号大于第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号；
当确定L＝2时，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ进程编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，当所述第二TB对应的NDI为1时，第一HARQ进程编号小于第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号。
17、根据权利要求12至15任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
L＝1或2，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外2个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外1个比特用于指示所述第一TB所对应的NDI；
当确定L＝1时，第一HARQ进程编号等于第二HARQ进程编号；
当确定L＝2时，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ进程编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，当所述第二TB对应的NDI为1时，第一HARQ进程编号大于第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号；
当确定L＝2时，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ进程编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，当所述第二TB对应的NDI为0时，第一HARQ进程编号小于第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号。
18、根据权利要求12至17任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
当L＝3时，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示第三HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外3个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI，所述第三HARQ进程编号为没有被调度的HARQ进程编号；和/或，
当L＝4时，第一比特中的4个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI。
19、根据权利要求12至17任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
当L＝3时，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示所述L个TB对应的HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外3个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI；和/或，
当L＝4时，第一比特中的4个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI。
20、根据权利要求12至19任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二比特和/或第一比特通过所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值指示MCS的索引；或者
当L＝1，2或3时，所述第二比特和/或第一比特通过所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值。
21、根据权利要求12至20任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，当L＝4时，第一比特的一个比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。
22、根据权利要求12至21任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，N＝4；和或，
M＝5，P＝5。
具体实施例可以如下：
A1，网络设备向终端设备发送所述下行控制信息。
其中，所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个TB，所述下行控制信息包括第一比特和第二比特；所述第一比特包括M个比特，所述第二比特包括P个比特，所述M和P为大于或等于1的整数；所述第二比特用于指示所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L，所述N和所述L是正整数，且1≤L≤N；所述第一比特的比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的混合自动重发请求HARQ进程号和所述L个TB的新数据指示NDI信息；所述第二比特和/或第一比特用于指示调制与解调策略(Modulation and Coding Scheme，MCS)；
在步骤A1之前，网络设备可以确定下行控制信息调度的传输块TB个数L；还可以确定所述L个TB的混合自动重发请求HARQ进程号；也可以确定所述L个TB的新数据指示NDI信息；也可以确定MCS。
A2，终端设备从网络设备接收下行控制信息，其中，所述下行控制信息能够调度最多N个传输块TB，所述N是正整数，例如N＝4。所述下行控制信息包括第一比特和第二比特，此处第一比特包括一个或多个字段，第二比特包括一个或多个字段。例如第一比特包括5个比特，第二比特包括5个比特。
A3，所述终端设备根据所述第二比特确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L(也可以称为HARQ process个数)，所述终端设备根据所述第一比特的比特确定所述L个TB(也可以称为L个HARQ process)所对应的混合自动重发请求HARQ进程号和所述L个TB(也可以称为L个HARQ process)的新数据指示NDI信息；所述终端设备根据所述第二比特确定调制与解调策略(Modulation and Coding Scheme，MCS)或MCS index。
A4，所述网络设备、所述终端设备根据所述调度的TB个数L，所述L个TB所对应的HARQ进程号，L个TB对应的NDI和MCS传输信息。
此处终端设备传输信息可以理解为接收信息，此时网络设备侧的传输信息可以理解为发送信息；或者终端设备传输信息理解为发送信息，此时网络设备的传输信息可以理解为接收信息。
示例性的，网络设备、终端设备传输的信息可以为PDSCH，也可以为PUSCH。
可选的，所述第二比特可以通过所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值指示所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数L。从而，所述终端设备可以根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值确定所述下行控制信息调度的TB个数。也就是说第二比特的所有比特所指示的索引所对应的第一数值V或第二比特的所有比特的状态所对应的第一数值V，相对于3进行求模运算所得的数来确定调度的TB数，即v mode 3，表示v/3后的余数来确定调度的TB数(或HARQ进程个数)。例如，所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为0，L＝1或2。再例如所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为1，L＝3。再例如，所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3进行取余运算后得到的数值为2，L＝4。也就是说第一数值相对于3求模后有三种取值：0，1，2，这个三种取值分别对应三种L的取值：1(或2)、3、4。本申请实施例中，第一数值相对于3求模后的三种取值与L的三种取值之间的对应关系不做限制，只要第一数值V对3求模后的数值指示了L＝{1或2}，L＝{3}，L＝{4}三种L取值即可。
可选的，L＝1或2，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程编号，，所述第一比特中的另外2个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外1个 比特用于指示所述第一TB所对应的NDI。此时由于调度了1或2个TB，因此此时至少有一个TB。
可选的，当第一HARQ进程编号等于第二HARQ进程编号时，L＝1。当第一HARQ进程编号大于第二进程编号时，L＝2，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，所述第二TB对应的NDI为1，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号；当第一HARQ进程编号小于第二进程编号时，L＝2，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，所述第二TB对应的NDI为0，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号。
可选的，当第一HARQ进程编号等于第二HARQ进程编号时，L＝1。当第一HARQ进程编号大于第二进程编号时，L＝2，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，所述第二TB对应的NDI为0，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号；当第一HARQ进程编号小于第二进程编号时，L＝2，2个TB中除所述第一TB以外的第二TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较大的HARQ进程编号，所述第二TB对应的NDI为1，所述第一TB对应的HARQ进程编号为第一HARQ process编号和第二HARQ进程编号中编号较小的HARQ进程编号。
可选的，当L＝3时，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示第三HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外3个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI，所述第三HARQ进程编号为没有被调度的HARQ进程编号。即此时一共有4个HARQ process进程，有L＝3被调度了，因此还有一个没有被调度，因此此处只要指示没有被调度的HARQ进程编号就可以知道剩余的3个HARQ进程编号所对应的HARQ进程被调度了。这样可以更灵活的指示，同时减小用户和基站的编解码复杂度，降低功耗。
可选的，L＝4时，第一比特中的4个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI。此时第一比特中一共有5个比特，可以选择前4个比特，或者其他位置的4个比特来指示NDI。
可选的，当L＝3时，所述第一比特中的2个比特用于指示所述L个TB对应的HARQ进程编号，所述第一比特中的另外3个比特用于指示所述L个TB所对应的NDI。此时由于在4个HARQ进程中指示3个被调度的HARQ进程，一种有4种可能，因此使用2个比特来进行指示。例如可以通过表8来进行指示，需要说明的是，只要用2个比特的4中状态来指示3个HARQ进程的编号就在本申请的保护范围，具体不做限制。例如，在{012，013，023，123}中指示三个被调度的HARQ进程编号。
表8
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000017
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000018
应理解，表8仅是一种示例性说明，并不对第一比特中的2个比特的状态与被调度的3个HARQ进程编号之间的对应关系进行具体限定。
可选的，所述第二比特和/或第一比特可以通过所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值指示MCS的索引。从而，所述终端设备根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。即此时对V相对于3向下取整，即floor(V/3)，其中floor(x)表示不大于x的整数，取整后得到的数用于确定MCS的索引。
或者，当L＝1，2或3时，所述第二比特和/或第一比特可以通过所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值。从而，当L＝1，2或3时，所述终端设备根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。即此时对V相对于3向下取整，即floor(V/3)，其中floor(x)表示不大于x的整数，取整后得到的数用于确定MCS的索引。
可选的，L＝4时，第一比特的一个比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如第一比特中的除4个NDI指示比特之外的1个比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如当该比特为0时表示根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引，当该比特为1时，表示MCS索引为10。
可选的，L＝4时，第一比特的一个比特用于指示第一偏移值，第一偏移值为大于或等于的整数，例如为0或1。根据第一偏移值和第二比特多对应的第一数值Z确定MCS的索引。例如根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V和第一偏移值Z的和相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如第一比特中的除4个NDI指示比特之外的1个比特用于指示第一偏移值为Z，Z＝0或Z＝1，根据V+Z相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引，即根据floor(Z+V)确定MCS的索引。
如表9所示，为该方法的一个例子，比特B0至B4表示第一比特，V为第二比特中的5个比特指示的数字，取值范围为0～31。第一字段中M0比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或根据所述第二比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。H0表示第一HARQ进程编号，H2表示第二HARQ进程编号，N0表示第一TB对应的NDI，N1，N2，N3表示调度的第二TB，第三TB，第四TB对应的NDI。Hx表示没有被调度的HARQ进程编号，或者调度的3个HARQ进程编号。Imcs，表示MCS的索引。
表9
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000019
如表10所示，为该方法的一个例子，比特B0至B4表示第一比特，V为第二比特中的5个比特指示的数字，取值范围为0～31。H0表示第一HARQ进程编号，H2表示第二HARQ进程编号，N0表示第一TB对应的NDI，N1，N2，N3表示调度的第二TB，第三TB，第四TB对应的NDI。Hx表示没有被调度的HARQ进程编号，或者调度的3个HARQ 进程编号。Imcs，表示MCS的索引。
表10
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000020
下面对本申请中的第i个TB给出定义。DCI指示或调度了N个HARQ process，把N个HARQ process number按照递增顺序排列。假设N个HARQ process number按照递增(或递减)顺序排列后的HARQ进程号是M(0)，M(1)，...，M(N-1)。其中第i个TB的HARQ process number是M(i-1)，其中i＝1，...，N。
在没有矛盾的情况下，本申请的各实施方式可以结合。
本文各实施方式中，比特对应的值可以是指比特指示的值，也可以是该比特的二进制值转换为十进制的值，此处不做具体限定。
通过上述通信方法，可以更灵活的指示，同时减小用户和基站的编解码复杂度，降低功耗。
本申请还提供另一种通信方法，用于解决如下问题：现有技术中允许一个DCI调度多个传输块(transmission block)。对于覆盖增强模式B的用户，最大调度的TB块个数为4。现有技术中用10个比特来指示NDI，HARQ process number，调度的TB数以及MCS。但是如何简单清晰的指示和解析并没有相应的办法。该方法可以应用于图1所示通信系统中的终端设备，下面从第一节点侧描述，该方法包括：
第一节点向第二节点发送下行控制信息。第一节点指示下行控制信息调度的TB数量，每个TB对应的HARQ进程号，各TB的NDI以及MCS索引。其中，共有11种或10种MCS索引。所述下行控制信息包括第三比特和第四比特。第三比特包括5个比特，第四比特包括5个比特。第三比特指示的值用于指示MCS索引和用于指示调度的TB数量。
第三比特指示的值V用于指示MCS索引Imcs。其中，V＝Imcs*3。第三比特指示的值V还用于确定调度的TB数量。或者，第三比特指示的值V和第四比特中的一个比特指示的偏移值Z用于指示MCS索引Imcs。其中V+Z＝Imcs*3。第三比特指示的值V还用于确定调度的TB数量。
例如，DCI调度了1个TB或者DCI调度了2个TB，则第三比特指示的值V是3的倍数。第四比特中有一个比特用于指示第一个TB对应的NDI，第四比特中有另外两个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程号(H0)。第四比特中还有两个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程号(H1)。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H0。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H1。若DCI指示调度了1个TB，则H0＝H1。且这个TB的HARQ进程号是H0。若DCI调度了2个TB，则H0≠H1，且2个TB的HARQ进程号分别是H0和H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝0，则H0<H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝1，则H0>H1。或者，若第2个TB的NDI＝0，则H0>H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝1，则H0<H1。
例如，DCI调度了1个TB或者DCI调度了2个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m，其中m是0或正整数。第四比特中有一个比特用于指示第一个TB对应的NDI，第四比特中有两个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程号(H0)，第四比特中还有两个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程号(H1)。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H0。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H1。 若DCI指示调度了1个TB，则H0＝H1。且这个TB的HARQ进程号是H0。若第2个TB的NDI与第一个TB的NDI相同，则H0<H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝0，则H0<H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝1，则H0>H1。或者，若第2个TB的NDI＝0，则H0>H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝1，则H0<H1。
例如，DCI调度了1个TB或者DCI调度了2个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m+1，其中m是0或正整数。第四比特中有一个比特用于指示第一个TB对应的NDI，第四比特中有两个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程号(H0)，第四比特中还有两个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程号(H1)。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H0。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H1。若DCI指示调度了1个TB，则H0＝H1。且这个TB的HARQ进程号是H0。若第2个TB的NDI＝0，则H0<H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝1，则H0>H1。或者，若第2个TB的NDI＝0，则H0>H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝1，则H0<H1。
例如，DCI调度了1个TB或者DCI调度了2个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m+2，其中m是0或正整数。第四比特中有一个比特用于指示第1个TB对应的NDI，第四比特中有两个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程号(H0)，第四比特中还有两个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程号(H1)。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H0。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H1。若DCI指示调度了1个TB，则H0＝H1。且这个TB的HARQ进程号是H0。若第2个TB的NDI＝0，则H0<H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝1，则H0>H1。或者，若第2个TB的NDI＝0，则H0>H1。若第2个TB的NDI＝1，则H0<H1。
例如，DCI调度了3个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m+1，其中m是0或正整数。第四比特中有3个比特用于分别指示3个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示3个TB对应的3个HARQ进程号H2。例如，在{012，013，023，123}中指示H2。或者第四比特中还有两个比特指示未调度的HARQ进程号H2(H2取值0，1，2，或3)。此时，3个TB对应的HARQ进程号是{0，1，2，3}中除H2外的剩下的3个进程号。
例如，DCI调度了3个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m，其中m是0或正整数。第四比特中有3个比特用于分别指示3个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示3个TB对应的3个HARQ进程号H2。例如，在{012，013，023，123}中指示H2。或者第四比特中还有两个比特指示未调度的HARQ进程号H2(H2取值0，1，2，或3)。此时，3个TB对应的HARQ进程号是{0，1，2，3}中除H2外的剩下的3个进程号。
例如，DCI调度了3个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m+2，其中m是0或正整数。第四比特中有3个比特用于分别指示3个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示3个TB对应的3个HARQ进程号H2。例如，在{012，013，023，123}中指示H2。或者第四比特中还有两个比特指示未调度的HARQ进程号H2(H2取值0，1，2，或3)。此时，3个TB对应的HARQ进程号是{0，1，2，3}中除H2外的剩下的3个进程号。
例如，DCI调度了4个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m，其中m是0或正整数。4个TB对应的HARQ进程号为0，1，2，3。第四比特的4个比特分别指示4个TB中每个TB对应的NDI。
例如，DCI调度了4个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m+1，其中m是0或正整数。4个TB对应的HARQ进程号为0，1，2，3。第四比特的4个比特分别指示4个TB中每个TB对应的NDI。
例如，DCI调度了4个TB，则第三比特指示的值V＝3m+2，其中m是0或正整数。4 个TB对应的HARQ进程号为0，1，2，3。第四比特的4个比特分别指示4个TB中每个TB对应的NDI。
可选的，L＝4时，第四比特的一个比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或指示根据所述第三比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如第四比特中的除4个NDI指示比特之外的1个比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或根据所述第三比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如当该比特为0时表示根据所述第三比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引，当该比特为1时，表示MCS索引为10。
可选的，L＝4时，第四比特的一个比特用于指示第一偏移值，第一偏移值为大于或等于的整数，例如为0或1。根据第一偏移值和第三比特对应的第一数值Z确定MCS的索引。例如根据所述第三比特对应的第一数值V和第一偏移值Z的和相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如第四比特中的除4个NDI指示比特之外的1个比特用于指示第一偏移值为Z，Z＝0或Z＝1，根据V+Z相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引，即根据floor(Z+V)确定MCS的索引。
例如，下表示意了另一种指示方法。下表中，Ni是TBi或者第i+1个TB的NDI。其中i在0，1，2，3中取值。例如，下表中的V是第三比特指示的值。floor是向下取整运算。第四比特包含b0，b1，b2，b3这4个比特。
如表11所示，为该方法的一个例子，比特B0至B4表示第四比特，V为第三比特中的5个比特指示的数字，取值范围为0～31。H0表示第一HARQ进程编号，H2表示第二HARQ进程编号，N0表示第一TB对应的NDI，N1，N2，N3表示调度的第二TB，第三TB，第四TB对应的NDI。Hx表示没有被调度的HARQ进程编号，或者调度的3个HARQ进程编号。Imcs，表示MCS的索引。
表11
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000021
如表12所示，为该方法的一个例子，比特B0至B4表示第四比特，V为第三比特中的5个比特指示的数字，取值范围为0～31。第一字段中M0比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或根据所述第四比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。H0表示第一HARQ进程编号，H2表示第二HARQ进程编号，N0表示第一TB对应的NDI，N1，N2，N3表示调度的第二TB，第三TB，第四TB对应的NDI。Hx表示没有被调度的HARQ进程编号，或者调度的3个HARQ进程编号。Imcs，表示MCS的索引。
表12
Figure PCTCN2019120061-appb-000022
下面从第二节点侧进行描述，该方法包括：
第二节点接收第一节点发送的下行控制信息。所述第二节点通过接收的下行控制信息确定了调度的TB数量，每个TB对应的HARQ进程号，各TB的NDI以及MCS索引。其中，共有11种或10种MCS索引。所述下行控制信息包括第三比特和第四比特。第三比特包括5个比特，第四比特包括5个比特。第二节点还根据第三比特指示的值确定调度的TB数量。
第二节点根据第三比特指示的值V确定MCS索引Imcs。其中，V＝Imcs*5。第二节点还根据第三比特指示的值V确定调度的TB数量。或者，第三比特指示的值V和第四比特中的一个比特指示的偏移值Z用于指示MCS索引Imcs。其中V+Z＝Imcs*3。第三比特指示的值V还用于确定调度的TB数量。
例如，第三比特指示的值V是3的倍数，则DCI调度了1个TB或者DCI调度了2个TB。第四比特中有一个比特用于指示第一个TB对应的NDI，第四比特中有另外两个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程号(H0)。第四比特中还有两个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程号(H1)。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H0。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H1。若H0＝H1，则DCI指示调度了1个TB。且这个TB的HARQ进程号是H0。若H0≠H1，则DCI调度了2个TB，且2个TB的HARQ进程号分别是H0和H1。若H0<H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝0。若H0>H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝1。或者，若H0<H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝1。若H0>H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝0。
例如，第三比特指示的值V＝3m+1，其中m是0或正整数，则DCI调度了1个TB或者DCI调度了2个TB。第四比特中有一个比特用于指示第一个TB对应的NDI，第四比特中有另外两个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程号(H0)。第四比特中还有两个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程号(H1)。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H0。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H1。若H0＝H1，则DCI指示调度了1个TB。且这个TB的HARQ进程号是H0。若H0≠H1，则DCI调度了2个TB，且2个TB的HARQ进程号分别是H0和H1。若H0<H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝0。若H0>H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝1。或者，若H0<H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝1。若H0>H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝0。
例如，第三比特指示的值V＝3m+2，其中m是0或正整数，则DCI调度了1个TB或者DCI调度了2个TB。第四比特中有一个比特用于指示第一个TB对应的NDI，第四比特中有另外两个比特用于指示第一HARQ进程号(H0)。第四比特中还有两个比特用于指示第二HARQ进程号(H1)。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H0。例如，在{0，1，2，3}中指示H1。若H0＝H1，则DCI指示调度了1个TB。且这个TB的HARQ进程号是H0。若H0≠H1，则DCI调度了2个TB，且2个TB的HARQ进程号分别是H0和H1。若H0<H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝0。若H0>H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝1。或者，若H0<H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝1。若H0>H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝0。
例如，第三比特指示的值V＝3m+2，其中m是0或正整数，则DCI调度了3个TB。第四比特中有3个比特用于分别指示3个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示3个TB对应的3个HARQ进程号H2。例如，在{012，013，023，123}中指示H2。或者，第四比特中有2个比特指示3个TB中除第一个TB外的其他2个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示未调度的HARQ进程号H2(H2取值0，1，2，或3)。此时，3个TB对应的HARQ进程号是{0，1，2，3}中除H2外的剩下的3个进程号。
例如，第三比特指示的值V＝3m+1，其中m是0或正整数，则DCI调度了3个TB。 第四比特中有3个比特用于分别指示3个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示3个TB对应的3个HARQ进程号H2。例如，在{012，013，023，123}中指示H2。或者，第四比特中有2个比特指示3个TB中除第一个TB外的其他2个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示未调度的HARQ进程号H2(H2取值0，1，2，或3)。此时，3个TB对应的HARQ进程号是{0，1，2，3}中除H2外的剩下的3个进程号。
例如，第三比特指示的值V＝3m，其中m是0或正整数，则DCI调度了3个TB。第四比特中有3个比特用于分别指示3个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示3个TB对应的3个HARQ进程号H2。例如，在{012，013，023，123}中指示H2。或者，第四比特中有2个比特指示3个TB中除第一个TB外的其他2个TB的NDI。第四比特中还有两个比特指示未调度的HARQ进程号H2(H2取值0，1，2，或3)。此时，3个TB对应的HARQ进程号是{0，1，2，3}中除H2外的剩下的3个进程号。
例如，第三比特指示的值V＝3m，其中m是0或正整数，则DCI调度了4个TB。4个TB对应的HARQ进程号为0，1，2，3。第四比特的4个比特分别指示4个TB中每个TB对应的NDI。
例如，第三比特指示的值V＝3m+1，其中m是0或正整数，则DCI调度了4个TB。4个TB对应的HARQ进程号为0，1，2，3。第四比特的4个比特分别指示4个TB中每个TB对应的NDI。
例如，第三比特指示的值V＝3m+2，其中m是0或正整数，则DCI调度了4个TB。4个TB对应的HARQ进程号为0，1，2，3。第四比特的4个比特分别指示4个TB中每个TB对应的NDI。
可选的，L＝4时，第四比特的一个比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或指示根据所述第三比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如第四比特中的除4个NDI指示比特之外的1个比特用于指示MCS的索引为10或根据所述第三比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如当该比特为0时表示根据所述第三比特对应的第一数值V相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引，当该比特为1时，表示MCS索引为10。
可选的，L＝4时，第四比特的一个比特用于指示第一偏移值，第一偏移值为大于或等于的整数，例如为0或1。根据第一偏移值和第三比特对应的第一数值Z确定MCS的索引。例如根据所述第三比特对应的第一数值V和第一偏移值Z的和相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引。例如第四比特中的除4个NDI指示比特之外的1个比特用于指示第一偏移值为Z，Z＝0或Z＝1，根据V+Z相对于3向下取整运算后得到的数值确定MCS的索引，即根据floor(Z+V)确定MCS的索引。
第三比特指示的索引对3进行取余运算后得到的数值为0，第二节点确定DCI调度了1个TB或2个T。第二节点根据第四比特中的一个比特确定第一个TB对应的NDI，第二节点根据第四比特中的另外两个比特确定第一HARQ进程号(H0)，第二节点根据第四比特中的另外两个比特确定第二HARQ进程号(H1)。H0＝H1，则第二节点确定DCI调度了1个TB，且这个TB的HARQ进程号是H0。H0≠H1，则第二节点确定DCI调度了2个TB，且2个TB的HARQ进程号分别是H0和H1。H0<H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝0。H0>H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝1。或者，H0>H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝0。H0<H1，则第2个TB的NDI＝1。
第三比特指示的索引对3进行取余运算后得到的数值为1，第二节点确定DCI调度了3个TB。第二节点根据第四比特中的3个比特确定3个TB的NDI。第二节点根据第四比特中的另外两个比特确定3个TB对应的HARQ进程号H2。例如，在{012，013，023，123}中指示H2。或者，第二节点根据第四比特中的2个比特确定3个TB中除第一个TB外的其他2个TB的NDI。第二节点根据第四比特中的另外两个比特确定未调度的HARQ进程号H2(H2取值0，1，2，或3)。此时，3个TB对应的HARQ进程号是{0，1，2，3}中除H2外的剩下的3个进程号。
第三比特指示的索引对3进行取余运算后得到的数值为2，第二节点确定DCI调度了4个TB，并确定4个TB对应的HARQ进程号为0，1，2，3。第二节点根据第四比特的4个比特分别确定每个TB对应NDI。
下面对本申请中的第i个TB给出定义。DCI指示或调度了N个HARQ process，把N个HARQ process number按照递增顺序排列。假设N个HARQ process number按照递增(或递减)顺序排列后的HARQ进程号是M(0)，M(1)，...，M(N-1)。其中第i个TB的HARQ process number是M(i-1)，其中i＝1，...，N。
在没有矛盾的情况下，本申请的各实施方式可以结合。
本文各实施方式中，比特对应的值可以是指比特指示的值，也可以是该比特的二进制值转换为十进制的值，此处不做具体限定。
通过上述通信方法，可以更灵活的指示，同时减小用户和基站的编解码复杂度，降低功耗。
本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理器中，也可以是单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。
其中，集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现时，通信装置可以如图4所示，处理单元301可以为处理器402。处理器402，可以是一个CPU，或者为数字处理模块等等。收发单元302可以为通信接口401，通信接口401可以是收发器、也可以为接口电路如收发电路等、也可以为收发芯片等等。该网络设备还包括：存储器403，用于存储处理器402执行的程序。存储器403可以是非易失性存储器，比如HDD或SSD等，还可以是volatile memory，例如RAM。存储器403是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。
处理器402用于执行存储器403存储的程序代码，具体用于执行上述处理单元301的动作，本申请在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口401、处理器402以及存储器403之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图4中以存储器403、处理器402以及通信接口401之间通过总线404连接，总线在图4中以粗线表示，其它部件之间的连接方式，仅是进行示意性说明，并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图4中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
本领域内的技术人员应明白，本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此，本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且，本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机 可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。
本申请是参照根据本申请实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器，使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中，使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品，该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上，使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理，从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。
显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本申请实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请实施例的精神和范围。这样，倘若本申请实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (31)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第一设备确定第一控制信息，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息；
    所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述第一控制信息；
    所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送所述紧急信息。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个传输功率控制命令TPC command用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述K个TPC command为预定义的，或，
    所述K个TPC command为所述第一设备确定，并通过高层信令配置给所述第二设备。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中TPC command之外的Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。
  5. 根据权利要求2至4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述第一控制信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第一设备确定第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息；
    所述第一设备向所述第二设备发送所述第二信息。
  6. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    第二设备接收第一设备发送的第一控制信息，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息；
    所述第二设备根据所述第一控制信息中的所述第一信息接收所述紧急信息。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个传输功率控制命令TPC command用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述K个TPC command为预定义的，或，所述K个TPC command为所述第二设备通过接收所述第一设备发送的高层信令确定的。
  9. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等 于1的整数。
  10. 根据权利要求7至9任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在第二设备接收第一设备发送的第一控制信息之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述第二设备接收所述第一设备发送的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息。
  11. 根据权利要求1或6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A或格式6-1B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第一字段用于指示所述第一信息。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一字段为物理随机接入信道掩码索引PRACH Mask index字段。
  13. 根据权利要求1或6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的调制编码方式字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第二字段用于指示所述第一信息；或者，
    所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第三字段用于指示所述第一信息。
  14. 根据权利要求1至13任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码CRC由系统信息无线网络临时标识SI-RNTI进行加扰。
  15. 根据权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述紧急信息包括如下信息中一个或多个：地震和海啸预警系统ETWS通知、商业流动警报服务CMAS通知、系统消息改变通知。
  16. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置应用于第一设备，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定第一控制信息，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息；
    收发单元，用于向第二设备发送所述处理单元确定的所述第一控制信息；以及，向所述第二设备发送所述紧急信息。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个传输功率控制命令编号TPC command number用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述K个TPC command number为预定义的，或，
    所述K个TPC command number为所述第一设备确定，并通过高层信令配置给所述第二设备。
  19. 根据权利要求16所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中TPC command number之外的Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。
  20. 根据权利要求17至19任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：在所述收发单元向第二设备发送所述第一控制信息之前，确定第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息；
    所述收发单元，还用于：向所述第二设备发送所述处理单元确定的所述第二信息。
  21. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置应用于第二设备，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收数据；
    处理单元，用于控制所述收发单元接收第一设备发送的第一控制信息，所述第一控制信息携带第一信息，所述第一信息用于指示紧急信息；所述第一控制信息为格式3的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式3A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A的控制信息；或者，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1B的控制信息；
    以及，根据所述第一控制信息中的所述第一信息控制所述收发单元接收所述紧急信息。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的K个传输功率控制命令编号TPC command number用于指示所述第一信息，其中K为大于或等于1的整数。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的装置，其特征在于，所述K个TPC command number为预定义的，或，所述K个TPC command number为所述第二设备通过接收所述第一设备发送的高层信令确定的。
  24. 根据权利要求21所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式3或格式3A的控制信息，所述第一控制信息中的Q个比特用于指示所述第一信息，其中Q为大于或等于1的整数。
  25. 根据权利要求22至24任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：
    在控制所述收发单元接收第一设备发送的第一控制信息之前，控制所述收发单元接收所述第一设备发送的第二信息，所述第二信息用于指示所述第一控制信息包含所述第一信息。
  26. 根据权利要求16或21所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式6-1A或格式6-1B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第一字段用于指示所述第一信息。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一字段为物理随机接入信道掩码索引PRACH Mask index字段。
  28. 根据权利要求16或21所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息为格式6-0B的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的调制编码方式字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第二字段用于指示所述第一信息；或者，
    所述第一控制信息为格式6-0A的控制信息，当所述第一控制信息的资源块分配字段的比特全部设置为1时，所述第一控制信息的第三字段用于指示所述第一信息。
  29. 根据权利要求16至28任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一控制信息的循环冗余校验码CRC由系统信息无线网络临时标识SI-RNTI进行加扰。
  30. 根据权利要求16至29任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述紧急信息包括如下 信息中一个或多个：地震和海啸预警系统ETWS通知、商业流动警报服务CMAS通知、用于指示系统消息改变的通知。
  31. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储程序，所述程序在被一个或多个处理器读取并执行时可实现权利要求1至15任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2019/120061 2019-03-29 2019-11-21 一种通信方法及设备 WO2020199609A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021557698A JP2022528384A (ja) 2019-03-29 2019-11-21 通信方法及びデバイス
EP19922626.7A EP3941124A4 (en) 2019-03-29 2019-11-21 METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION
CN201980094855.6A CN113647163B (zh) 2019-03-29 2019-11-21 一种通信方法及设备
BR112021019510A BR112021019510A2 (pt) 2019-03-29 2019-11-21 Método e dispositivo de comunicação
US17/487,965 US20220022021A1 (en) 2019-03-29 2021-09-28 Communication method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CNPCT/CN2019/080645 2019-03-29
PCT/CN2019/080645 WO2020199023A1 (zh) 2019-03-29 2019-03-29 一种通信方法及设备
PCT/CN2019/111545 WO2020199552A1 (zh) 2019-03-29 2019-10-16 一种通信方法及设备
CNPCT/CN2019/111545 2019-10-16

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/487,965 Continuation US20220022021A1 (en) 2019-03-29 2021-09-28 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020199609A1 true WO2020199609A1 (zh) 2020-10-08

Family

ID=72664498

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/080645 WO2020199023A1 (zh) 2019-03-29 2019-03-29 一种通信方法及设备
PCT/CN2019/111545 WO2020199552A1 (zh) 2019-03-29 2019-10-16 一种通信方法及设备
PCT/CN2019/120061 WO2020199609A1 (zh) 2019-03-29 2019-11-21 一种通信方法及设备

Family Applications Before (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/080645 WO2020199023A1 (zh) 2019-03-29 2019-03-29 一种通信方法及设备
PCT/CN2019/111545 WO2020199552A1 (zh) 2019-03-29 2019-10-16 一种通信方法及设备

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US20220022021A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP3941124A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP2022528384A (zh)
CN (1) CN113647163B (zh)
BR (1) BR112021019510A2 (zh)
WO (3) WO2020199023A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220303842A1 (en) * 2020-08-05 2022-09-22 Apple Inc. Network Configuration of CSI-RS Based Radio Resource Management

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102868467A (zh) * 2011-07-08 2013-01-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Etws及处理etws告警消息的方法
CN107925983A (zh) * 2015-08-13 2018-04-17 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中通知si更新、eab更新和pws消息的方法和设备
WO2018093208A1 (en) * 2016-11-17 2018-05-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transceiving a warning message in a wireless communication system
WO2018143849A1 (en) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods, user equipment and radio network node for multimedia broadcast multicast service

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107948952A (zh) * 2010-10-01 2018-04-20 三菱电机株式会社 通信系统
CN104937991B (zh) * 2013-01-17 2019-07-26 太阳专利信托公司 采用下行链路控制信息的动态时分双工上行链路/下行链路配置
CN106211329A (zh) * 2014-12-23 2016-12-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 下行信息的发送方法及装置
US10492047B2 (en) * 2015-01-28 2019-11-26 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Terminal device, base station device, and method
US10548123B2 (en) * 2015-05-15 2020-01-28 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Terminal device, base station device, and method
JP2018148248A (ja) * 2015-07-28 2018-09-20 シャープ株式会社 端末装置、基地局装置および方法
CN106559809A (zh) * 2015-09-25 2017-04-05 中兴通讯股份有限公司 系统信息发送方法、接收方法、发送装置及接收装置
EP3364689A1 (en) * 2015-11-02 2018-08-22 NTT DoCoMo, Inc. User terminal, radio base station and radio communication method
CN108370594B (zh) * 2015-12-31 2020-09-25 华为技术有限公司 数据传输处理方法、用户设备和基站
US10772117B2 (en) * 2016-07-07 2020-09-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and user equipment for receiving downlink signal
US10687319B2 (en) * 2016-08-08 2020-06-16 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Group power control for a secondary cell
US10178536B2 (en) * 2016-08-12 2019-01-08 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Update indication information
GB2554649A (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-11 Tcl Communication Ltd Systems and methods for frequency division duplex communication

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102868467A (zh) * 2011-07-08 2013-01-09 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Etws及处理etws告警消息的方法
CN107925983A (zh) * 2015-08-13 2018-04-17 Lg电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中通知si更新、eab更新和pws消息的方法和设备
WO2018093208A1 (en) * 2016-11-17 2018-05-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transceiving a warning message in a wireless communication system
WO2018143849A1 (en) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods, user equipment and radio network node for multimedia broadcast multicast service

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ANONYMOUS: "3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding (Release 14)", 3GPP STANDARD ; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ; 3GPP TS 36.212, vol. RAN WG1, no. V14.4.0, 26 September 2017 (2017-09-26), pages 1 - 198, XP051337332 *
See also references of EP3941124A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2020199023A1 (zh) 2020-10-08
JP2022528384A (ja) 2022-06-10
BR112021019510A2 (pt) 2021-12-07
EP3941124A1 (en) 2022-01-19
US20220022021A1 (en) 2022-01-20
EP3941124A4 (en) 2022-04-20
WO2020199552A1 (zh) 2020-10-08
CN113647163B (zh) 2023-07-18
CN113647163A (zh) 2021-11-12

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2015110010A1 (zh) 一种寻呼消息传输方法及装置
CN111294960B (zh) 识别下行控制信息的方法及设备
US11044147B2 (en) Resource configuration method and apparatus
EP3565159B1 (en) Data processing method and apparatus
US10873430B2 (en) Signal sending method and apparatus
WO2018201486A1 (zh) 一种消息发送方法、消息接收方法及对应设备
CN113708899A (zh) 多载波调度方法、装置及设备
WO2018058561A1 (zh) 指示harq进程号的方法、网络设备和用户设备
WO2024082813A1 (zh) Harq进程的分配方法、装置、基站及存储介质
WO2022077496A1 (zh) 一种资源调度指示方法及装置
WO2017024565A1 (zh) 数据传输方法、装置及系统
US20220022021A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2021072610A1 (zh) 一种激活和释放非动态调度传输的方法及装置
WO2019223558A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及系统
CN110612684B (zh) 一种应答反馈方法、终端及网络设备
US20220022217A1 (en) Communication method and device
EP4192113A1 (en) Access information indication method, apparatus and system
WO2022077396A1 (zh) 一种上行控制信息的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
WO2021056595A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2021030943A1 (zh) 一种确定重复传输资源的方法及装置
WO2022027508A1 (zh) 一种资源调度方法及通信装置
WO2024092673A1 (zh) 数据信道的调度方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN113748723B (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2023123387A1 (zh) 一种资源分配指示域的大小的确定方法及终端设备、网络设备
WO2021146968A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19922626

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021557698

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112021019510

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019922626

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20211012

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112021019510

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20210929